and my phone

P8 Smartphone FAQs
(GRA-L09/GRA-UL00)
Author
LMT Team
Date
2015/03
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address:
Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
Version
Changed by
Change Description
Date
V1.0
Fu Jing (employee ID:
wx00276575)
Completed the first draft.
2015-04-16
Liu Qiang (employee
ID: 00163818)
Zhang Ning
(employee ID:
00256055)
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
Contents
Contents...................................................................................................................................... iii
1.1 What can I do if the Bluetooth headset, Bluetooth car kit, or the speaker fails to be searched or connected? ............. 1
1.2 Why can't my phone automatically connect to the Bluetooth car kit after the Bluetooth car kit is enabled? ............... 1
1.3 Why can't I listen to music using the Bluetooth headset? ............................................................................................. 1
1.4 What can I do if the voice call made using the Bluetooth headset is not clear?............................................................ 2
1.5 Why can't I hear the navigation sound using the Bluetooth car kit? ............................................................................. 2
1.6 Does my phone support the automatic call answering function using the Bluetooth headset? ..................................... 3
1.7 Does my phone support Bluetooth 4.0 BLE? ............................................................................................................... 3
1.8 Why can't I find the wrist band or other Bluetooth 4.0 devices on the Bluetooth settings screen?............................... 3
1.9 Why can't I enable or disable the Bluetooth function? ................................................................................................. 3
1.10 Why can't I access the Internet after my phone is connected to a Wi-Fi network over a router? ................................ 3
1.11 Why is the connection to the Wi-Fi network interrupted? .......................................................................................... 4
1.12 Why can't I enable Wi-Fi? .......................................................................................................................................... 4
1.13 Why can't I disable Wi-Fi? .......................................................................................................................................... 4
1.14 Why can't my phone connect to a Wi-Fi network through a router? ........................................................................... 4
1.15 Why does the download task over a Wi-Fi network stop after the screen turns off? .................................................. 6
1.16 Why can't my phone connect to the router over the Wi-Fi network and why does my phone fail to obtain an IP
address? .............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
1.17 Why does the Wi-Fi network speed become slow or the signal become poor? .......................................................... 8
1.18 Can my phone be connected to an iPhone over Bluetooth? ........................................................................................ 9
1.19 Why does the call using the Bluetooth headset have noise and intermittent problems? ............................................. 9
1.20 Why doesn't the Bluetooth headset have any sound? .................................................................................................. 9
1.21 Why can't the Bluetooth car kit work after it is connected to my phone? ................................................................... 9
1.22 When I flick down from the status bar and touch the Wi-Fi icon, why is Wi-Fi enabled slowly? ............................ 10
1.23 Why does the Wi-Fi switch become unavailable? .................................................................................................... 10
1.24 Why is the Wi-Fi function automatically turned on after I turn if off? ..................................................................... 11
1.25 Why can't my phone scan any Wi-Fi hotspot? .......................................................................................................... 11
1.26 Why can my phone scan the Wi-Fi hotspot only near the router? ............................................................................ 11
1.27 Why can't my phone scan a certain hotspot but can scan other hotspots? ................................................................ 11
1.28 Why can't my phone scan any hotspot in other countries? ....................................................................................... 11
1.29 Why is the scanned hotspot name displayed in unreadable code? ............................................................................ 12
1.30 Why does the Wi-Fi device list display the same hotspot information without refreshing? ..................................... 12
1.31 Why is the confirmation button unavailable after I enter the Wi-Fi connection password? ..................................... 12
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
1.32 Why can't my phone successfully connect to the hotspot due to authentication failure? .......................................... 12
1.33 Why does my phone display the message indicating that the settings are saved but my phone fails to successfully
connect to the hotspot? ..................................................................................................................................................... 12
1.34 Why does my phone fail to connect to a home Wi-Fi network? ............................................................................... 13
1.35 Why does my phone fail to connect to a public Wi-Fi network? .............................................................................. 13
1.36 Why does my phone fail to access the Internet after it is connected to the home Wi-Fi network? ........................... 13
1.37 Why does my phone fail to access the Internet after it is connected to the public Wi-Fi network? .......................... 13
1.38 Why does my phone fail to access the Internet after it is connected to a private Wi-Fi hotspot? ............................. 13
1.39 Why does the network speed become slow after my phone is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot? ................................. 14
1.40 Why does the Wi-Fi speed become slow after I connect my phone to a Bluetooth headset or a speaker? ............... 14
1.41 Why is the MAC address of the Wi-Fi network unavailable? ................................................................................... 14
1.42 Why is the data service disabled after I turn off Wi-Fi? ........................................................................................... 14
1.43 After I set my phone to disconnect from the Wi-Fi network after the screen turns off, why is it connected to the XX
network after the screen turns on? .................................................................................................................................... 15
1.44 What data formats can be transmitted over Bluetooth? ............................................................................................ 15
1.45 How do I send a file using Bluetooth? ...................................................................................................................... 15
1.46 Why can't I pair my phone with other Bluetooth devices? ....................................................................................... 15
1.47 What protocols are used by Bluetooth functions? ..................................................................................................... 15
1.48 Does my phone support the Bluetooth APT-X function? .......................................................................................... 16
1.49 Why can't I clearly hear the voice using the Bluetooth car kit or Bluetooth headset? .............................................. 16
1.50 How can I use the BLE function? ............................................................................................................................. 16
1.51 How can I connect my phone to a smart BLE device? ............................................................................................. 16
1.52 Why does the Bluetooth call have the intermittent, noise, and echo problems? ....................................................... 16
1.53 Why can't the Bluetooth headset display its battery level? ....................................................................................... 17
1.54 What is Wi-Fi+? ........................................................................................................................................................ 17
1.55 How can I enable or disable the Wi-Fi+ function? ................................................................................................... 17
1.56 How can I restore the settings after I select the Do not prompt option on the notification confirmation interface? . 17
1.57 How can I set up a connection between my phone and B2? ..................................................................................... 17
1.58 How can I reconnect the wrist band and my phone after the Bluetooth connection is interrupted? ......................... 18
1.59 How can I reconnect a wrist band to my phone after a failed connection? ............................................................... 19
1.60 Why does the B2 and my phone occasionally keep automatically disconnecting from each other? ........................ 19
1.61 How can I use the B2 to answer calls? ..................................................................................................................... 19
1.62 What can I do with the missed call icon on my B2? ................................................................................................. 20
1.63 Why is the voice unclear or not smooth when I use the B2 to make calls? .............................................................. 20
1.64 How can I perform smart unlock using B2? ............................................................................................................. 20
1.65 Why does the B2 smart unlock function sometimes fail to work properly? ............................................................. 21
1.66 How can I use the B2 to take photos using remote control? ..................................................................................... 21
1.67 How can I find my phone using my B2? .................................................................................................................. 21
1.68 Why can't I hear the voice in WeChat when my B2 is connected? ........................................................................... 21
2 Skytone .................................................................................................................................... 22
2.1 Does my phone support Skytone?............................................................................................................................... 22
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
3 Smart cover .............................................................................................................................. 23
3.1 Why does my phone enter smart cover mode sometimes I turn on the screen? .......................................................... 23
3.2 What can I do if my phone mistakenly identifies the leather case and turns off the screen? ...................................... 23
3.3 Why can't I use the gesture to answer a call when my phone is attached with a leather case? ................................... 23
3.4 Why does my phone automatically open its music player when attached with a leather case? .................................. 23
3.5 Why can't I operate my phone on the transparent plastic sheet after my phone is attached with a leather case? ....... 24
3.6 How do I switch to the clock style? ............................................................................................................................ 24
4 Camera, music, and video ..................................................................................................... 25
4.1 Why is the DTS effect not obvious? ........................................................................................................................... 25
4.2 Why can't I view photos I have taken before after I open the camera by double pressing the volume down button? 25
4.3 Can I disable the shutter sound for snapshots? ........................................................................................................... 25
4.4 How do I enable the snapshot function? ..................................................................................................................... 25
4.5 Why can I only view the current photo after I have set the security lock for my screen?........................................... 25
4.6 Why can't the headset provided with iPhone 4 work properly for my phone?............................................................ 25
4.7 Why does my phone play songs when I press the button on my headset? .................................................................. 26
4.8 Why can't the optional headset work properly? .......................................................................................................... 26
4.9 Why does smearing occur when I view photos in full-screen from the Pictures folder in Gallery? ........................... 26
4.10 What can I do if the sound from the headset is abnormal? ....................................................................................... 26
4.11 What can I do if the other party can't hear my voice when I am making a phone call using my headset?................ 26
4.12 Why is Music automatically opened after I inserted a headset to my phone? .......................................................... 27
4.13 Why do I hear a sound when I shake my phone? ...................................................................................................... 27
4.14 Why is the ringtone of an incoming call suddenly muted? ....................................................................................... 27
4.15 Why does my phone automatically start recording? ................................................................................................. 27
4.16 How do I prevent my phone from charging the noise reduction headset? ................................................................ 27
4.17 Why is the sound not stable when I play songs in speaker mode at a small volume (two to three bars)? ................ 28
4.18 Why can I hear noise or current noise when I play songs in speaker mode at the minimum volume? ..................... 28
4.19 Why can't my phone play videos in MPEG-4 format? ............................................................................................. 28
4.20 How do I modify the application that I use to share photos? .................................................................................... 28
4.21 Why is the date in Gallery several years ago? .......................................................................................................... 29
4.22 Why is there light leakage around the battery cover after I turn on flash? ............................................................... 29
4.23 Why isn't music paused when I answer calls? .......................................................................................................... 29
4.24 Why isn't there a ringtone for incoming calls after I set the volume to the maximum? ............................................ 30
4.25 What can I do if I can't use the snapshot function? ................................................................................................... 30
4.26 Why are the photos I take in ultra snapshot mode not as good as the photos I take in normal mode? ..................... 30
4.27 Why can't I open the camera on my phone? ............................................................................................................. 30
4.28 Why is the volume of the recorded video small? ...................................................................................................... 30
4.29 Why does it take longer to focus when I take photos at a short distance from the object than when I take photos at a
long distance from the object? .......................................................................................................................................... 30
4.30 Why is the photo focus unclear when I take a photo in a dark environment? ........................................................... 31
4.31 Why does the photo become vague after I zoom in? ................................................................................................ 31
4.32 Why is my phone severely overheated after I take photos or shoot videos for a certain time period? ..................... 31
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
4.33 Why are the photos I take using the front camera reverse?....................................................................................... 31
4.34 Can I modify watermark images? ............................................................................................................................. 31
4.35 Why do I see a gap when I tilt my phone and look into it through the flash lens? ................................................... 32
4.36 Why do photos taken at night have speckled pixels? ................................................................................................ 32
4.37 Why do videos taken near lights have ripples? ......................................................................................................... 32
4.38 Why does my face look thinner and my eyes bigger in my selfie? ........................................................................... 32
4.39 Why is the photo of a moving object blurred? .......................................................................................................... 32
4.40 Why is the image on the viewfinder blurred until 2 to 3 seconds after I open the camera? ...................................... 32
4.41 Why does the photo of bulbs I take at night have radial halo? ................................................................................. 33
4.42 Why is the photo of a night scene still dark even after I turn on flash? .................................................................... 33
4.43 Why is the viewfinder red when I cover the camera with my hand? ........................................................................ 33
4.44 Why is the photo taken with flash on blurred? ......................................................................................................... 33
4.45 Why do the photos I take with flash on have red eyes or bright spots? .................................................................... 33
4.46 Why can't I take photos at the resolution of 6 MP, 8 MP, 10 MP, or 13 MP? ........................................................... 34
4.47 Why can't I find the photos I take after I set the default storage location for photos to the external microSD card? 34
4.48 Why doesn't beauty mode work for burst shots? ...................................................................................................... 34
4.49 How is the time displayed on the ultra snapshot screen calculated? ......................................................................... 35
4.50 Why does the video recording suddenly stop? .......................................................................................................... 35
4.51 What can I do if I see black spots and smudges on the viewfinder after I use the camera for several months? ....... 35
4.52 Why is the photo focus unclear after I dropped my phone to the ground? ............................................................... 35
4.53 What can I do if I can't use the flash? ....................................................................................................................... 35
4.54 Why are the photos blurred? ..................................................................................................................................... 36
4.55 What are the differences between Super night mode of my phone and long exposure of other phones? ................. 36
4.56 What are the requirements toward the shooting environment in Super night mode? ................................................ 36
4.57 Why do some areas of the photo in preview mode seem red? .................................................................................. 37
4.58 Why is there an occulting stripe on the viewfinder when I am shooting scenes with light color background? ........ 37
4.59 Why are the photos seem red with a high saturation degree? ................................................................................... 37
4.60 Why do the brightness and color change when I touch on the previewed photo? .................................................... 37
4.61 Why is the photo loaded slowly after I shoot it? ....................................................................................................... 37
4.62 Why are there white dots on the photos taken against strong light? ......................................................................... 38
4.63 Why does the viewfinder have shadows or seem red when I am taking photos with flash turned on? ..................... 38
4.64 If my phone has no microSD card installed, can I take photos or shoot videos? ...................................................... 38
4.65 Why can't I open some photos or videos on my phone? ........................................................................................... 38
4.66 Where are my photos and videos saved by default? Can I change the save location? .............................................. 38
4.67 How do I edit a photo or video? How do I add a frame to a photo? ......................................................................... 39
4.68 Does my phone support HD videos? ........................................................................................................................ 39
4.69 Can I disable the shutter sound? ............................................................................................................................... 39
4.70 How do I toggle between the front and rear cameras? .............................................................................................. 39
4.71 What video formats and sizes does my phone support? ............................................................................................ 39
4.72 What photo formats and sizes does my phone support? ........................................................................................... 39
4.73 How do I switch between shooting modes? .............................................................................................................. 40
4.74 Why does my gallery display only the photos I have taken? .................................................................................... 40
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
4.75 Will my phone stop playing streaming media when a call comes in? If yes, will it resume playing when the call
ends? ................................................................................................................................................................................. 40
4.76 My phone cannot play some streaming media. Why? .............................................................................................. 40
4.77 What might cause poor quality of online streaming media played on my phone? .................................................... 40
4.78 Will simultaneously playing and downloading online streaming media take up my phone's storage space? ........... 41
4.79 Why can't audio control of my camera function properly? ....................................................................................... 41
4.80 Why doesn't the photo file name contain .pdf after I saved it in PDF format? ......................................................... 41
4.81 Why can't I view the screenshots but only photos I have taken when I set Gallery in timeline mode? .................... 41
4.82 Why do photos still rotate after I disable the auto-rotate function? .......................................................................... 41
4.83 Why can't I search for lyrics after I enable online lyrics? ......................................................................................... 43
4.84 Why is my phone's front camera deviated? .............................................................................................................. 43
4.85 Why are there no sounds when I play videos in MKV format? ................................................................................ 43
4.86 How do I set the microSD card as my default save location for photos and videos?................................................ 43
4.87 How do I set the radio to turn off at a scheduled time? ............................................................................................ 43
4.88 How do I adjust the volume of the radio? ................................................................................................................. 43
4.89 How do I add the location information to a photo? .................................................................................................. 43
4.90 How do I set a photo to display its shooting time and place? ................................................................................... 44
4.91 How do I edit photos in all-focus mode? .................................................................................................................. 44
4.92 Why can't I shoot panoramic photos? ....................................................................................................................... 44
4.93 How do I take photos in macro mode? ..................................................................................................................... 44
4.94 Why is the panoramic photo discontinuous? ............................................................................................................ 44
4.95 How do I modify the watermark texts? ..................................................................................................................... 44
4.96 How do I turn off flash? ............................................................................................................................................ 44
4.97 What is ISO? ............................................................................................................................................................. 45
4.98 What is white balance? ............................................................................................................................................. 45
4.99 How do I turn on flash when shooting photos? ........................................................................................................ 45
4.100 How do I shoot a moving object? ........................................................................................................................... 45
4.101 How do I cancel scheduled photo shooting? ........................................................................................................... 45
4.102 Why can't some photos in Gallery properly displayed? .......................................................................................... 45
4.103 How do I view all photos in timeline mode? .......................................................................................................... 45
4.104 Why does the screen blink when I flick left and right to view photos in full-screen mode in Gallery? ................. 46
4.105 How do I find the photos and videos on the microSD card after they are lost? ...................................................... 46
4.106 Why do the sounds of songs and videos come from the receiver? .......................................................................... 46
4.107 Why is the focusing time sometimes short and sometimes long? ........................................................................... 46
4.108 Why does it take a long time to refresh the preview or stop shooting in Star track mode when I am using Light
painting? ........................................................................................................................................................................... 46
4.109 How do I switch between the four modes of Light painting? ................................................................................. 47
4.110 Why are the photos I take using Light painting in hand held mode are blurred? .................................................... 47
4.111 How do I achieve good photos using Light graffiti mode of Light painting? ......................................................... 47
4.112 How do I achieve good photos using Tail light trails mode of Light painting? ...................................................... 48
4.113 How do I achieve good photos using Silky water mode of Light painting? ........................................................... 48
4.114 Why are the track lines thick on photos taken in Light graffiti mode in a dark room? ........................................... 48
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
4.115 Why is the photo that I take using Light painting white?........................................................................................ 48
4.116 Why isn't there any change on the viewfinder after I touch the shooting button in Star track mode of Light
painting? ........................................................................................................................................................................... 48
4.117 How do I use Director Mode? ................................................................................................................................. 49
4.118 Where can I obtain Director Mode? ........................................................................................................................ 51
4.119 What can I do if the screen freezes when I am using Director Mode? .................................................................... 51
4.120 What can I do if the guest phone can't find the host phone? ................................................................................... 51
4.121 What can I do if the guest phone can't connect to the host phone? ......................................................................... 53
4.122 How do I view videos taken in Director Mode? ..................................................................................................... 53
4.123 How to I remove a guest phone from the current group? ....................................................................................... 53
4.124 How long can the video be that is taken in Director Mode? ................................................................................... 54
4.125 Can I use Director Mode to shoot videos when my phone's battery level is low? .................................................. 54
4.126 Why can't other phones create groups in Director Mode? ...................................................................................... 54
4.127 Why does my phone generate heat after I use Director Mode for a while? ............................................................ 54
4.128 Will Director Mode consume data traffic? .............................................................................................................. 54
4.129 Why can't I add background music when I am editing a video using Director Mode? ........................................... 54
4.130 How does the host phone control the shooting on the guest phone in Director Mode? .......................................... 55
4.131 Is the sound recorded by the guest phone or host phone when the screen of the guest phone is displayed on the
host phone? ....................................................................................................................................................................... 55
4.132 Why does the original sound disappear when I add background music in Director Mode? ................................... 55
4.133 Why can't I use Director Mode on some phones? ................................................................................................... 55
4.134 Why are the beauty effects of photos taken using Perfect selfie different from those in beauty mode? ................. 55
4.135 Why are the faces seem red on the photos taken using Perfect selfie? ................................................................... 55
4.136 Why is the photo taken using Perfect selfie reverse compared to the preview? ..................................................... 56
4.137 What can I do if the focusing fails, shadowing occurs, and the preview shakes when I take photos using the
optical image stabilization (OIS) camera? ........................................................................................................................ 56
4.138 How many axes are used for the stabilization of my OIS camera? ......................................................................... 56
4.139 Why can't the stabilization function work properly on a bus or in the subway? ..................................................... 56
4.140 Why is the stabilization effect not as good as that of a single-lens reflex camera? ................................................ 56
4.141 Why is the viewfinder blurred when I am shooting a moving object? .................................................................... 57
4.142 Why are the photos still blurred even if my phone is provided with a OIS camera? .............................................. 57
4.143 What are the differences between the RGBW sensor and the RGB sensor? ........................................................... 57
4.144 Why is the image drifting in preview, especially in digital zoom mode? ............................................................... 57
4.145 Why is the photo quality affected if I stop shooting early in Super night mode? ................................................... 57
4.146 What languages can be translated between one another using the online translation function of my camera? ...... 58
4.147 Does my phone's camera (EMUI 3.0 or later) support online translation? ............................................................. 58
4.148 Does my phone's camera (EMUI 2.3) support online translation? ......................................................................... 58
4.149 Can I edit the watermarks in watermark mode?...................................................................................................... 58
4.150 What can I do if the photos taken using Light painting are the same as those taken in normal mode? .................. 58
4.151 How do I use my camera to scan a QR code? ......................................................................................................... 58
4.152 What are the special functions of Perfect selfie? .................................................................................................... 59
4.153 What can I do if my face isn't thinner using Perfect selfie? .................................................................................... 59
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
4.154 How do I use Director Mode? ................................................................................................................................. 59
4.155 What are the differences between the video shooting in Director Mode and that in normal mode? ....................... 59
4.156 How do I shoot better photos using timer mode? ................................................................................................... 59
4.157 How do I improve the music quality? ..................................................................................................................... 59
4.158 How do I make photos clearer? .............................................................................................................................. 60
4.159 How do I hide or cancel hiding albums? ................................................................................................................. 60
4.160 Why does ultra snapshot still work when the screen is turned on? ......................................................................... 60
4.161 Why can't I find the photos I have taken in Gallery? .............................................................................................. 60
4.162 Why can't ultra snapshot work? .............................................................................................................................. 60
4.163 Why isn't sound coming out from the right side of my phone when I am playing videos in speaker mode? ......... 60
4.164 Why can't my phone play flash videos? .................................................................................................................. 60
4.165 How to I improve my selfies? ................................................................................................................................. 61
4.166 How do I adjust the speed for time-lapse mode? .................................................................................................... 62
4.167 Can I adjust the focal length in time-lapse mode? .................................................................................................. 62
4.168 Why are the photos taken using Light painting white? ........................................................................................... 62
4.169 Can I customize the shooting words for audio control? .......................................................................................... 63
4.170 How do I customize the shooting parameters of Super night mode? ...................................................................... 63
4.171 Why can't Object recognition work properly? ........................................................................................................ 64
4.172 How do I hide all photos? ....................................................................................................................................... 64
4.173 What can I do if albums can't be displayed in coordinate format? .......................................................................... 65
4.174 How do I recover the hidden applications? ............................................................................................................. 67
4.175 What are the functions of Color correction? ........................................................................................................... 67
4.176 What are Object recognition? ................................................................................................................................. 67
4.177 Does my phone support Object recognition? .......................................................................................................... 68
4.178 Does Object recognition require network connection? ........................................................................................... 68
4.179 Why can't my phone recognize the object I am shooting using Object recognition? .............................................. 68
4.180 How do I use Smart headset control to play music? ............................................................................................... 68
4.181 Does my phone support Smart headset control? ..................................................................................................... 70
4.182 Can I use Smart headset control to control other music players? ........................................................................... 70
4.183 Why do sounds come out from only one side at the bottom of my phone? ............................................................ 70
4.184 Why isn't OIS supported when I am recording a video? ......................................................................................... 71
5 Calls and contacts ................................................................................................................... 72
5.1 Can I activate the calling function with the screen turned off by pressing and holding the volume button when my
phone is connected to a Bluetooth headset? ..................................................................................................................... 72
5.2 After I press and hold the volume down button, why can't I activate the calling function with the screen turned off
after voice input? .............................................................................................................................................................. 72
5.3 Why is the call setup success rate low if I just say "contact" with the screen turned off? .......................................... 72
5.4 Why is the call failed if I speak a contact with some content in English when the screen is turned off? ................... 72
5.5 Why can't I use a Bluetooth headset to activate the calling function with the screen turned off?............................... 73
5.6 What can I do if the calling function with the screen turned off doesn't work when my phone is equipped with a SIM
card? ................................................................................................................................................................................. 73
5.7 Why does my phone automatically make a call even if I didn't input my voice? ....................................................... 73
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
5.8 How long does it take to press and hold the button to activate the calling function with the screen turned off?........ 73
5.9 Why can't I make phone calls when my phone receives 3G signals? ......................................................................... 73
5.10 Why is my phone disconnected from the 4G network when I make phone calls? .................................................... 74
5.11 Why can't I make phone calls or calls drop even when the signal is strong? ............................................................ 74
5.12 What can I do if a message indicating that a voice mailbox number is missing is displayed when I make a phone
call?................................................................................................................................................................................... 74
5.13 Why can't my dialer display phone numbers from historical calls? .......................................................................... 74
5.14 Why can't I clear the notifications for new voice mails by flicking down from the status bar to display the
notification panel? ............................................................................................................................................................ 74
5.15 Why do I frequently miss the phone calls? ............................................................................................................... 75
5.16 Why do I hear noise during phone calls? .................................................................................................................. 75
5.17 Why does my phone enter airplane mode when a call disconnects? ......................................................................... 75
5.18 Why can't I receive incoming calls or why does the calling party hear that the called party is in a call or is busy? 76
5.19 Why does the call ringtone stop when I press the power button? ............................................................................. 76
5.20 Why doesn't the call log in China Mobile versions contain the call duration? ......................................................... 76
5.21 Why can't I answer or end calls on my phone? ......................................................................................................... 76
5.22 Why can't I find a desired contact address if I use the non-initial letter for the search? ........................................... 76
5.23 Why is the number of contacts saved to my phone less than the number of contacts copied from the vCard or the
SIM card? ......................................................................................................................................................................... 76
5.24 Why are some call records of the same contact combined, but some records of the same contact separated? ......... 77
5.25 Why aren't the call records combined? ..................................................................................................................... 77
5.26 Why doesn't my phone display the contact photo for incoming calls even after I have set the contact photo? ........ 77
5.27 Why do I hear echoes during the phone calls? .......................................................................................................... 77
5.28 Why does the phone ringtone volume automatically decrease?................................................................................ 77
5.29 Why is the call discontinuous sometimes and why can't one party or both parties hear the sound? ......................... 78
5.30 What can I do if the volume in speaker mode is small? ............................................................................................ 78
5.31 What can I do if the playback volume of call records is small? ................................................................................ 78
5.32 Why can't the other party hear me or why is my voice volume small during calls? ................................................. 78
5.33 What can I do if the receiver's volume is small? ....................................................................................................... 78
5.34 Why do I hear noise when I play music using the speaker? ..................................................................................... 79
5.35 Why do I hear noise in the downlink during a phone call in the handsfree mode? ................................................... 79
5.36 Why can't I store contacts? ....................................................................................................................................... 79
5.37 Why is my phone powered off when I press the power button? ............................................................................... 79
5.38 Why can't I create a contact photo? .......................................................................................................................... 80
5.39 How many contacts can the phone store? ................................................................................................................. 80
5.40 Why can't I make phone calls when my phone receives 4G signals? ....................................................................... 80
5.41 Where are the recorded calls saved? ......................................................................................................................... 80
5.42 How do I switch between calls or merge two calls to have a conference call? ......................................................... 80
5.43 What does a card display when a call is coming through the card during a call through another card? ................... 81
5.44 How do I view call logs? .......................................................................................................................................... 81
5.45 Why isn't a new contact in the Contacts although the Dialer screen shows that the contact is successfully created?
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 81
5.46 Why doesn't my phone prompt for the specific card of the incoming calls? ............................................................ 81
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
5.47 Why does my phone suddenly dial a number?.......................................................................................................... 81
5.48 How can I set the quick calling function? ................................................................................................................. 81
5.49 When my dual-card phone displays emergency calls, why can I make calls? .......................................................... 82
5.50 Why is the incoming number displayed as unknown? .............................................................................................. 82
5.51 Why is the screen still off after I move my phone away from my ear?..................................................................... 82
5.52 How do I delete call logs?......................................................................................................................................... 82
5.53 How can I delete the pre-installed ringtone? ............................................................................................................ 83
5.54 How do I export contacts to another phone using a SIM card? ................................................................................ 83
5.55 How do I export contacts to another phone using a storage device? ........................................................................ 83
5.56 How do I assign a unique ringtone for a contact or contact group? .......................................................................... 83
5.57 How do I assign a photo to a contact? ...................................................................................................................... 83
5.58 How do I display the contacts in the SIM card? ....................................................................................................... 84
5.59 Does my phone support video calls? ........................................................................................................................ 84
5.60 How can I cancel the keyboard touch sound? ........................................................................................................... 84
5.61 How can I query the missed calls? ............................................................................................................................ 84
5.62 How can I add multiple numbers to a contact? ......................................................................................................... 84
5.63 How can I set the contact storage location? .............................................................................................................. 84
5.64 How can I quickly find a contact? ............................................................................................................................ 84
5.65 How can I set the blacklist of the incoming calls? .................................................................................................... 85
5.66 Why can't I hear the voice of another party during a call? ........................................................................................ 85
5.67 How can I bar the international calls? ....................................................................................................................... 85
5.68 How do I return to the call screen? ........................................................................................................................... 85
5.69 How do I make IP calls? ........................................................................................................................................... 85
5.70 How do I activate the call waiting function? ............................................................................................................ 85
5.71 How do I forward all incoming calls to another number?......................................................................................... 86
5.72 How can I forward the unanswered calls to another number? .................................................................................. 86
5.73 How can I forward the unreachable calls to another number? .................................................................................. 86
5.74 How do I edit the text message for rejected incoming calls? .................................................................................... 86
5.75 How do I set the phone to automatically block malicious calls? .............................................................................. 86
5.76 How do I delete a favorite contact? .......................................................................................................................... 86
5.77 How do I remove a contact from the blacklist? ........................................................................................................ 87
5.78 How do I delete intercepted call and SMS logs? ...................................................................................................... 87
5.79 How do I quickly mute the incoming call? ............................................................................................................... 87
5.80 How do I quickly dial a number? .............................................................................................................................. 87
5.81 How can I set the contact blacklist? .......................................................................................................................... 87
5.82 How do I merge contacts?......................................................................................................................................... 87
5.83 How do I perform quick calling using my Bluetooth headset? ................................................................................. 87
5.84 Why doesn't my phone respond to the voice instruction for quick calling? .............................................................. 88
5.85 How can I cancel the quick calling? ......................................................................................................................... 88
5.86 Why does my phone fail to save a new contact? ...................................................................................................... 88
5.87 Why can't I select the SIM card for making calls?.................................................................................................... 88
5.88 Why does my phone end a call if I press the power button during the call? ............................................................. 88
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
5.89 Why does my phone vibrate when I answer a call? .................................................................................................. 88
5.90 Why are the imported contacts garbled? ................................................................................................................... 89
5.91 How do I check the time of a missed call? ............................................................................................................... 89
6 Storage and file management ............................................................................................... 90
6.1 Why can't my phone access the Internet after I connect it to the computer using a USB cable? ................................ 90
6.2 Why can't I find a screenshot? .................................................................................................................................... 90
6.3 When the storage card is full, why can't I open an app? ............................................................................................. 90
6.4 Can I install a microSD card to my phone? ................................................................................................................ 90
6.5 Why are some files copied before my phone's update process starts using a USB flash drive? ................................. 90
6.6 After two phones are connected and set, why can't my phone display a tab of USB options? ................................... 91
6.7 Why does the Manage apps show that my phone's memory is less than 2 GB or 3 GB? ........................................... 91
6.8 Why is some of my phone's memory still occupied after I clear all the recently used applications? .......................... 91
6.9 Why doesn't my phone display any notification after I connect it to the computer? .................................................. 91
6.10 Why can't my phone detect certain microSD cards? ................................................................................................. 91
6.11 Why can't I perform USB debugging? ...................................................................................................................... 92
6.12 After I enable the USB debugging mode, why can't my phone connect to the computer? ....................................... 92
6.13 How do I check the available storage in the phone memory and microSD card? ..................................................... 92
6.14 What functions are provided by the prompted options after I connect my phone to the computer? ......................... 92
6.15 Where are my files saved by default? ....................................................................................................................... 92
6.16 How do I format the internal storage? ...................................................................................................................... 93
6.17 Why is the data in the microSD card lost after I remove the microSD card? ........................................................... 93
6.18 How can I format a microSD card? .......................................................................................................................... 93
6.19 Can I manage files by categories? ............................................................................................................................ 93
6.20 How can I view the phone information? ................................................................................................................... 93
6.21 After I access the gallery with a keyboard connected, why can't I view the specific album using the Down button?
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 93
7 Smart IR ................................................................................................................................... 94
7.1 Does my phone support the Smart IR function? ......................................................................................................... 94
8 Location service and navigation ........................................................................................... 95
8.1 Why does the GPS positioning function fail? ............................................................................................................. 95
8.2 Why can't the GPS of my phone search for a satellite? .............................................................................................. 95
8.3 Why can't a third-party application map load the map data? ...................................................................................... 95
8.4 Why is the location information of the third-party positioning application inconsistent with the actual situation? ... 96
8.5 Why does the GPS icon occasionally appear on the status bar? ................................................................................. 96
8.6 Why is the compass inaccurate? ................................................................................................................................. 96
8.7 Does my phone support the BeiDou Navigation Satellite System and how do I check whether the BeiDou
Navigation Satellite System is running? ........................................................................................................................... 96
8.8 Is the GPS function charged? ...................................................................................................................................... 96
8.9 How can I enable GPS? .............................................................................................................................................. 97
8.10 What is GPS? ............................................................................................................................................................ 97
8.11 How can I strengthen the GPS signals? .................................................................................................................... 97
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
8.12 What are the GPS working principles? ..................................................................................................................... 97
8.13 What are the differences between the GPS and the base station positioning? .......................................................... 98
8.14 How can I prohibit an application from acquiring personal location information? .................................................. 98
9 SIM card and appearance ...................................................................................................... 99
9.1 Why does my phone read the contacts from the SIM card slowly? ............................................................................ 99
9.2 Why can't a non-standard SIM card be inserted into the card tray? ............................................................................ 99
9.3 Why can't my phone detect the SIM card? ................................................................................................................. 99
9.4 Why can't I insert the SIM card into my phone smoothly? ....................................................................................... 100
9.5 Why are the outer surfaces of the SIM and microSD card trays and the surfaces of the aluminum decorations uneven?
........................................................................................................................................................................................ 100
9.6 Why doesn't the SIM card slot have a spring? .......................................................................................................... 100
9.7 Why are the two gaps on the two sides of the SIM card tray harsh? ........................................................................ 100
9.8 How can I identify the SIM or microSD card insertion direction? ........................................................................... 100
9.9 Why do I feel the SIM card tray shaking? ................................................................................................................ 101
9.10 Why are there marks left on the cover after I connected my phone to a USB cable for multiple times? ................ 101
9.11 Why is the plastics around the touchscreen easy to get smudgy? ........................................................................... 101
9.12 Why is the gap between the battery cover and the mechanical part large? ............................................................. 101
9.13 Why is the front camera deviated? .......................................................................................................................... 101
9.14 What can I do if the phone is bent and deformed? .................................................................................................. 102
9.15 Why is my phone's charging port seem black and used? ........................................................................................ 102
9.16 Why does the label on the battery cover show "network access on trial"? ............................................................. 102
9.17 Why do I feel the power button unstable? .............................................................................................................. 102
9.18 How can I turn on the screen if the power button does not work? .......................................................................... 102
9.19 Why there are two black bars on the USB port of a new phone? ............................................................................ 102
9.20 Why can't I take out the microSD card inserted in the SIM card tray? ................................................................... 103
9.21 Can I insert a nano-SIM card to my phone? ........................................................................................................... 103
9.22 Why are there knock marks on the frames of my phone after it is used for a while? ............................................. 103
9.23 How do I take out the SIM card tray without the eject tool? .................................................................................. 103
9.24 Why do I see a gap when I tilt my phone and look into it through the flash lens? ................................................. 103
9.25 What can I do if the metal decorations become deformed after my phone is dropped?.......................................... 104
9.26 Why do I have to push the SIM card tray really hard for it to come out? ............................................................... 104
9.27 Why isn't the STK menu available when I touch the SIM card signal? .................................................................. 104
9.28 What are the specifications for cards placed in the upper and lower card trays? .................................................... 104
9.29 Why can't my phone detect the inserted SIM card after my phone is powered on? ................................................ 104
9.30 Why do I hear sound when I press the phone buttons? ........................................................................................... 104
9.31 Why do I feel the buttons loose or tight? ................................................................................................................ 105
9.32 What is the color scheme? ...................................................................................................................................... 105
9.33 Can I remove the battery cover and pre-installed battery?...................................................................................... 105
9.34 Why are there no indications on two card trays? .................................................................................................... 105
9.35 Does my phone support the micro-SIM card? ........................................................................................................ 105
10 Messaging and email ......................................................................................................... 106
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
10.1 Why doesn't the multimedia message send report take effect? ............................................................................... 106
10.2 Why doesn't the multimedia message read report take effect? ............................................................................... 107
10.3 Why can't I log in to the company's email using the Exchange? ............................................................................ 107
10.4 What can I do if I can't connect to the server when refreshing my emails? ............................................................ 108
10.5 What can I do if I can't connect to the QQ mailbox because I haven't activated the IMAP and POP3 services? ... 108
10.6 Why can't I send or receive messages? ................................................................................................................... 108
10.7 What can I do if I can't send messages at a certain time? ....................................................................................... 108
10.8 Why is the image attached to the multimedia message I sent to another phone unclear? ....................................... 108
10.9 Why doesn't my phone play any tone for received SMSs? ..................................................................................... 109
10.10 Why doesn't my phone display the SMSs according to the time sequence and why are some SMSs fixed to the top?
........................................................................................................................................................................................ 110
10.11 Why can't I log in to Gmail using Exchange? ....................................................................................................... 110
10.12 How can I lock a specific message or delete messages in batch? ......................................................................... 110
10.13 How many Chinese and English characters can be contained in a text message? ................................................ 110
10.14 How many text messages can be saved on my phone? ......................................................................................... 110
10.15 What can I do if I can't send or receive multimedia messages? ............................................................................ 111
10.16 Is there any restriction on the size, format, or resolution of the file to be attached to a multimedia message? .... 111
10.17 Where are the multimedia message attachments saved? ....................................................................................... 111
10.18 How do I configure email settings? ...................................................................................................................... 111
10.19 Can I view emails when no Internet connection is available on my phone? ......................................................... 112
10.20 How do I synchronize contacts and calendar events? ........................................................................................... 112
10.21 Why can't I change the ringtone and vibration settings of my email? .................................................................. 112
10.22 How can I set a different ringtone for the messages? ........................................................................................... 113
10.23 How do I preview new messages on the notification panel? ................................................................................ 114
10.24 Can I restore deleted messages? ........................................................................................................................... 114
10.25 Is there any restriction on the email attachment size? ........................................................................................... 114
10.26 Why doesn't my phone play any tone?.................................................................................................................. 114
10.27 How can I add a message signature? .................................................................................................................... 114
10.28 How do I hide the sender information when forwarding a message? ................................................................... 115
10.29 How do I send contact information using the multimedia message? .................................................................... 116
10.30 How can I block harassment messages? ............................................................................................................... 116
10.31 How do I remove an email account? ..................................................................................................................... 117
10.32 How can I view the contacts on the blacklist? ...................................................................................................... 117
10.33 How do I clear unread notifications? .................................................................................................................... 118
10.34 Can I change the Message ringtone?..................................................................................................................... 118
11 Network access and data sharing ......................................................................................... 1
11.1 Why is there no signal displayed in the signal bar? .................................................................................................... 1
11.2 Why is the network unavailable when I browse a web page or download data? ........................................................ 1
11.3 Why does my Phone use only the GSM services while it is roaming? ....................................................................... 1
11.4 Why does the signal strength become poor when I place my phone on metallic objects or use a cover made of metal?
............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
11.5 Does my phone support the GSM 850 MHz network while it is roaming in other countries?.................................... 2
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiv
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
11.6 Why can't my phone access the Internet or use data services?.................................................................................... 2
11.7 Why does my phone have no signal after I take it out from my pocket and become normal after I restart it? ........... 2
11.8 Why is the signal unstable? ......................................................................................................................................... 2
11.9 Why is there no signal suddenly?................................................................................................................................ 3
11.10 How do I share a network and enable a Wi-Fi hotspot? ............................................................................................ 3
11.11 How do I set a static IP address for my phone to connect to a Wi-Fi network? ........................................................ 4
11.12 How do I set the modem function of my phone to connect to the computer? ........................................................... 4
11.13 What are the differences between FDD and TDD? ................................................................................................... 4
11.14 Does my phone support SIM card hot swapping? ..................................................................................................... 4
11.15 Why can't I delete the data usage record for the current date? .................................................................................. 5
11.16 Why is my daily data usage refreshed to my monthly data limit every day after my data usage exceeds the
monthly limit? ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5
11.17 How can I save my data usage? ................................................................................................................................ 5
11.18 How do I set my phone not to automatically recover the mobile network connection when the Wi-Fi connection is
interrupted? ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5
11.19 Why can't I connect my phone using an OTG cable? ............................................................................................... 6
11.20 Why can't I connect my phone to a USB drive using the OTG cable?...................................................................... 6
11.21 Can I connect my phone to a mouse or a keyboard using the OTG cable? ............................................................... 6
11.22 Why does my phone fail to transfer files after the Bluetooth connection is successful? .......................................... 6
11.23 How do I view my phone's MAC address? ............................................................................................................... 6
11.24 How can I tell whether the phone is connecting to the Internet using mobile data or Wi-Fi network? ..................... 7
11.25 How do I view mobile data usage? ........................................................................................................................... 7
11.26 Can I share my phone's mobile network connection using a USB cable? ................................................................. 7
11.27 How can I tell whether my phone supports Bluetooth tethering? ............................................................................. 7
11.28 What is a Wi-Fi hotspot? ........................................................................................................................................... 7
11.29 How do I add a bookmark in the built-in web browser? ........................................................................................... 8
11.30 How do I close pages in the built-in browser? .......................................................................................................... 8
11.31 How do I open a new page in the built-in browser? .................................................................................................. 8
11.32 How do I delete personal data from the built-in browser? ........................................................................................ 8
11.33 How do I save an image from a web page?............................................................................................................... 8
11.34 How do I transfer files using OTG? .......................................................................................................................... 8
11.35 Why is the network speed slow when I use the Wi-Fi connection? .......................................................................... 9
11.36 When I send files using Bluetooth, why does the Wi-Fi connection sometimes become unavailable? .................... 9
11.37 Why can't I access the Internet in the ultra power saving mode? .............................................................................. 9
11.38 How do I disable the 4G network connection? ......................................................................................................... 9
11.39 Why does my phone have no 4G signal? .................................................................................................................. 9
11.40 Does the 4G network consume much traffic? ........................................................................................................... 9
11.41 Why can't I access the 4G network? ....................................................................................................................... 10
11.42 Can my 4G phone use the 3G card? ........................................................................................................................ 10
11.43 What is 4G?............................................................................................................................................................. 10
11.44 Why does the 4G phone consume more traffic than the 3G phone? ....................................................................... 10
11.45 How can I use the 4G service? ................................................................................................................................ 10
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
11.46 Why is the usage calibration message of Phone Manager incorrect or is the calibration failed? ............................ 11
11.47 Why can I use only the 2G network? ...................................................................................................................... 11
11.48 What is Signal+? ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
11.49 Where can I learn the Signal+ description? ............................................................................................................ 11
11.50 What is Roaming+?................................................................................................................................................. 11
11.51 Where can I learn the Roaming+ description? ........................................................................................................ 11
12 Screen and display ............................................................................................................... 12
12.1 What can I do if my screen is erratic? ....................................................................................................................... 12
12.2 Why can I see some horizontal lines under lights when the screen is turned off? .................................................... 12
12.3 Why doesn't the touchscreen respond when I slide the screen to unlock? ................................................................ 12
12.4 Why does my phone automatically open apps or display screens when I am using the phone while it is charging? 13
12.5 Why is the automatic LCD brightness adjustment discontinuous? ........................................................................... 13
12.6 Why does my screen have scratches? ....................................................................................................................... 13
12.7 Why is the screen darker or brighter? ....................................................................................................................... 13
12.8 Why do ripples appear on my screen when I press it hard? ...................................................................................... 14
12.9 Why isn't the screen of my phone as bright-colored and beautiful as that of a Samsung phone? ............................. 14
12.10 What can I do if my screen is exposed to water? .................................................................................................... 14
12.11 Why does my screen look a little yellow? ............................................................................................................... 14
12.12 Why does my phone have a light leakage problem when the screen is turned off? ................................................ 15
12.13 Why does the screen have bright spots, dark spots, impurity spots, or black spots? .............................................. 15
12.14 Why are there black margins on the upper and lower edges of the screen or the edges darker? ............................ 16
12.15 Why is the screen of my phone a little red, unclear, or blurry? .............................................................................. 16
12.16 Why does my screen automatically change or why does my phone automatically open software? ....................... 16
12.17 Why doesn't the touchscreen respond sometimes? ................................................................................................. 16
12.18 Why does the screen turn off during a call? ............................................................................................................ 16
12.19 Why doesn't the screen automatically rotate? ......................................................................................................... 17
12.20 Why can't the virtual buttons on the navigation bar be hidden? ............................................................................. 17
12.21 If I forget the screen unlock pattern or password, what can I do?........................................................................... 17
12.22 Why is the touchscreen slow or unresponsive during normal use? ......................................................................... 18
12.23 How do I cancel the screen unlock password?........................................................................................................ 19
12.24 How do I delete unnecessary home screens? .......................................................................................................... 19
12.25 How do I set a live wallpaper? ................................................................................................................................ 19
12.26 How do I capture a screenshot? .............................................................................................................................. 20
12.27 How do I set the screen switching effect? ............................................................................................................... 20
12.28 How do I add a widget to the home screen? ........................................................................................................... 20
12.29 How do I exit the simple home screen? .................................................................................................................. 20
12.30 How do I display the navigation bar? ..................................................................................................................... 21
12.31 How do I use the screen lock widget?..................................................................................................................... 21
12.32 Why doesn't my phone screen turn off after I cover my palm on it? ...................................................................... 21
12.33 How do I quickly wake up the screen? ................................................................................................................... 21
12.34 Can I operate my phone using wet hands? .............................................................................................................. 21
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvi
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
12.35 How do I switch back to the home screen in preview mode? ................................................................................. 21
12.36 When does my phone display the interactive screensaver? .................................................................................... 22
13 System settings ..................................................................................................................... 23
13.1 How do I quickly enable Huawei Music? ................................................................................................................. 23
13.2 What can I do if I can't find English words in my words in Huawei Swype? ........................................................... 23
13.3 Why aren't there shortcut number buttons on the keyboard of Huawei Swype? ....................................................... 23
13.4 Does the Text-to-Voice function support Chinese? ................................................................................................... 23
13.5 How do I change the system language? .................................................................................................................... 24
13.6 How do I change the system font size? ..................................................................................................................... 24
13.7 What can I do if my phone can't automatically adjust its screen brightness? ........................................................... 24
13.8 What can I do if my phone can't automatically rotate its screen? ............................................................................. 24
13.9 Why does the font size remain unchanged after I set it to large? .............................................................................. 24
13.10 Where can I draw the unlock pattern after I turn on the screen? ............................................................................. 24
13.11 Why can't I unlock my screen when I flick upwards or downwards on the lock screen? ....................................... 25
13.12 How do I hide the virtual buttons? .......................................................................................................................... 25
13.13 How do I exit Developer options? .......................................................................................................................... 25
13.14 How do I hide apps, such as WeChat, in visitor mode? .......................................................................................... 26
13.15 What can I do if my phone automatically sends messages in the background to query the data usage? ................ 28
13.16 Why is there a blinking red frame on the screen? ................................................................................................... 28
13.17 Can I clear the data usage record? .......................................................................................................................... 28
13.18 How do I set the remaining battery level to be displayed in percentage? ............................................................... 28
13.19 How do I set the text to speech function? ............................................................................................................... 29
13.20 Why can't I lock my screen during phone calls and isn't there any screen locking sound? .................................... 29
13.21 Why are the folder icons disordered? ..................................................................................................................... 30
13.22 Why are the icons disordered after I unlock the screen, and why are the icons automatically recovered after I
re-arrange them? ............................................................................................................................................................... 30
13.23 Why are the icons moved to the upper part of the home screen when I uninstall certain icons on the home screen?
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
13.24 Why is the magazine unlock update stopped at a certain percentage? .................................................................... 30
13.25 Why are some widgets lost when I arrange the home screen? ................................................................................ 30
13.26 Why are certain icons disappeared or overlapped? ................................................................................................. 31
13.27 Why can't I find the camera app icon on the home screen? .................................................................................... 31
13.28 Why is the screen brightness a little darker when I browse a web page?................................................................ 31
13.29 Why does the screen brightness become brighter in normal power-saving mode? ................................................. 31
13.30 How do I connect my phone to the HiSuite? .......................................................................................................... 31
13.31 How do I set tones on my phone? ........................................................................................................................... 31
13.32 How do I set a screen unlock PIN? ......................................................................................................................... 32
13.33 How do I set a screen unlock pattern? .................................................................................................................... 32
13.34 What can I do if I forget the unlock pattern? .......................................................................................................... 32
13.35 How do I lock and unlock the screen? .................................................................................................................... 32
13.36 How do I add and remove an alarm? ...................................................................................................................... 32
13.37 How do I set the Weather app? ............................................................................................................................... 33
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
13.38 How do I view the Developer options? ................................................................................................................... 33
13.39 How do I free up internal storage space? ................................................................................................................ 34
13.40 How do I turn on or off airplane mode? .................................................................................................................. 34
13.41 How do I restore my phone to its factory settings? ................................................................................................. 34
13.42 How does my phone enter or exit safe mode? ........................................................................................................ 34
13.43 Does my phone support HDMI? ............................................................................................................................. 34
13.44 Does my phone support TV-out? ............................................................................................................................ 34
13.45 Does my phone support OTG? ............................................................................................................................... 34
13.46 Can I use other power adapters than the provided one to charge my phone? ......................................................... 35
13.47 How do I enter recovery mode? .............................................................................................................................. 35
13.48 How do I use the multi-screen function? ................................................................................................................ 35
13.49 Does my phone support power-on/off tone? If yes, how do I turn off the power-on/off tone? ............................... 36
13.50 How do I query my phone number? ....................................................................................................................... 36
13.51 How do I enter USB debugging mode? .................................................................................................................. 36
13.52 How do I disable power-intensive notification? ..................................................................................................... 36
13.53 Why are the shortcut switches hidden in the notification panel? ............................................................................ 36
13.54 Which system sounds can be configured on my phone? ......................................................................................... 37
13.55 How do I customize the shortcut switches in the notification panel? ..................................................................... 37
13.56 How do I view phone information such as the operating system version? ............................................................. 37
13.57 How do I set the flip-to-mute function? .................................................................................................................. 37
13.58 How do I add a Calendar widget to the home screen? ............................................................................................ 37
13.59 How do I display the birthday in the calendar?....................................................................................................... 38
13.60 How do I create events in the calendar? ................................................................................................................. 38
13.61 How do I delete events from the calendar? ............................................................................................................. 38
13.62 What can I do if I forget the password of an encrypted backup file? ...................................................................... 38
13.63 How do I enable One-hand UI mode? .................................................................................................................... 38
13.64 Why can't I use gloves mode? ................................................................................................................................. 39
13.65 How do I download the font package?.................................................................................................................... 40
13.66 How do I effectively identify the bullet items and processed items in the Notes? .................................................. 40
13.67 Why can't I open the music player when I double-touch the lock screen? .............................................................. 40
13.68 Why can't I directly open the app after I draw the corresponding letter on the screen?.......................................... 40
13.69 Does my phone support suspend buttons? .............................................................................................................. 40
13.70 How do I enable the suspend buttons? .................................................................................................................... 40
13.71 Can I change the positions of the suspend buttons? ................................................................................................ 40
13.72 Can I change the positions of each key in the suspend buttons? ............................................................................. 41
13.73 How do I change the magazine unlock wallpapers? ............................................................................................... 41
13.74 Why does my phone automatically change wallpapers? ......................................................................................... 41
13.75 How can my phone not display the corner mark of the icons on the home screen?................................................ 41
13.76 Can the app icons on the home screen automatically align with each other? ......................................................... 42
13.77 How do I disable the news function on the home screen? ...................................................................................... 43
13.78 What is NewsFeed? ................................................................................................................................................ 43
13.79 Why can't the home screen circularly slided? ......................................................................................................... 44
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xviii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
13.80 Can I manually adjust the size of the Widgets? ...................................................................................................... 44
13.81 How do I change the folder name? ......................................................................................................................... 44
13.82 Why is the circular sliding function unavailable? ................................................................................................... 44
13.83 How do I set the unlock pattern? ............................................................................................................................ 44
13.84 How do I set my phone to display the network speed? ........................................................................................... 44
13.85 How do I hide the navigation bar after enabling the Touchplus function?.............................................................. 45
13.86 Why is the screen zoomed out and isn't the content displayed in full screen? ........................................................ 46
13.87 Why does my phone often display Touch-disable? ................................................................................................. 48
13.88 Why is only a part of movie downloaded even if I set my phone to download it for a long period of time? ......... 48
13.89 Why is Wi-Fi disabled after I enable a Wi-Fi hotspot? ........................................................................................... 48
13.90 How can I disable the notification displayed when I turn off Wi-Fi? ..................................................................... 48
13.91 Why is the automatic rotation function invalid? ..................................................................................................... 48
13.92 Why is there no ringtone for the alarm?.................................................................................................................. 48
13.93 How do I hide/display the service provider name in the status bar? ....................................................................... 49
13.94 Why is the notification panel background blurred after I flick down the status bar? .............................................. 49
13.95 Why does my phone still display the 3G icon after I turn off the data services? .................................................... 49
13.96 Why is the status bar displayed in the notification panel when I flick the status bar down? .................................. 49
13.97 Why is the screen suddenly zoomed out and displayed near the lower left corner or lower right corner? ............. 49
13.98 Why is the voice assistant automatically activated and why does it prompt for inputting the speech awareness
instruction again? .............................................................................................................................................................. 50
13.99 What is Smartcare? ................................................................................................................................................. 50
13.100 What event types does the Smartcare provide? ..................................................................................................... 50
13.101 How do I enable the Smartcare function? ............................................................................................................. 50
13.102 Does my phone support the Smartcare function? ................................................................................................. 50
13.103 How do I set Touch-disable? ................................................................................................................................. 50
13.104 How do I tell whether my phone is authentic? ...................................................................................................... 51
13.105 What can I do if my phone keeps displaying the update information? ................................................................. 51
13.106 How do I view all reminders of the Smartcare? .................................................................................................... 52
13.107 Why doesn't my phone send me smart itinerary reminders? ................................................................................. 52
13.108 When does my phone send me smart itinerary reminders? ................................................................................... 52
13.109 How do I set the birthday reminder using the Smartcare? .................................................................................... 52
13.110 Can the Smartcare function remind me of the weather change? ........................................................................... 53
13.111 Can the Smartcare send flight reminders? ............................................................................................................. 53
13.112 Can the Smartcare send train reminders? .............................................................................................................. 53
13.113 Can the Smartcare send hotel reminders? ............................................................................................................. 53
13.114 Can the Smartcare send conference reminders? .................................................................................................... 53
13.115 How do I set the status bar not to display notifications? ....................................................................................... 54
13.116 Can I set One-hand UI mode? ............................................................................................................................... 54
13.117 Why does my phone often automatically switch over One-hand UI mode? ......................................................... 54
13.118 Why does my phone automatically make a call? .................................................................................................. 54
13.119 Why are the suspend icons disordered after I restart my phone? .......................................................................... 54
13.120 How can I hide the apps such as WeChat? ............................................................................................................ 54
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
13.121 What is the Touchplus function? ........................................................................................................................... 55
13.122 How do I enable the Touchplus function? ............................................................................................................. 55
13.123 How do I use the touch areas in the upper part of the screen after I attach the touchplus film to my phone? ...... 55
14 System software.................................................................................................................... 56
14.1 Why does my phone fail to start up, repeatedly restart, or not respond when I press and hold the power button?... 56
14.2 Why does my phone run slowly when the battery level is low? ............................................................................... 56
14.3 Why does the game app run slowly? ........................................................................................................................ 57
14.4 Why does the system of my phone run slowly? ........................................................................................................ 57
14.5 Why is the app loaded slowly? ................................................................................................................................. 58
14.6 Why is the app in the folder loaded slowly? ............................................................................................................. 58
14.7 Why can't I disable the traffic monitoring function?................................................................................................. 58
14.8 Why are the suspend icons disordered after I restart my phone? .............................................................................. 58
14.9 Why doesn't the indicator blink when a notification is received during charging? ................................................... 58
14.10 Why is the screen suddenly zoomed in and a blue frame displayed around the screen? ........................................ 59
14.11 Why is there a blinking red frame on the screen? ................................................................................................... 59
14.12 Why does the screen display the clock only in certain area and what can I do if the touchscreen does not respond?
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
14.13 Why is the calculator open after I unlock the screen? ............................................................................................. 59
14.14 How do I set a voice mailbox number?................................................................................................................... 59
14.15 How can I use the backup function in Settings? ..................................................................................................... 59
14.16 Why does my phone often prompt "XX app restricted from accessing location info"? .......................................... 60
14.17 How do I disable the traffic notification function? ................................................................................................. 60
14.18 How do I disable the permission prohibition notifications? ................................................................................... 60
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption ...................................................................... 61
15.1 What is my phone's temperature rise?....................................................................................................................... 61
15.2 Why does my phone generate heat when I am using it? ........................................................................................... 61
15.3 Why does my phone generate excessive heat when I watch videos? ........................................................................ 61
15.4 What can I do if my phone generates heat when I browse web pages? .................................................................... 62
15.5 What can I do if my phone generates excessive heat when I am playing games? .................................................... 62
15.6 Why does my phone generate excessive heat when I am playing songs? ................................................................. 62
15.7 Why does my phone generate excessive heat when I am making phone calls? ........................................................ 62
15.8 What can I do if my phone generates excessive heat? .............................................................................................. 63
15.9 Does my phone generate heat due to its poor quality? .............................................................................................. 64
15.10 Why does my phone generate excessive heat even when I am not using it? .......................................................... 64
15.11 Why does it take a long time to charge my phone? ................................................................................................. 65
15.12 Why does it take a long time to charge my phone when it is generating excessive heat?....................................... 65
15.13 Why does my phone sometimes repeatedly restart after it is connected to a charger and powered on? ................. 65
15.14 How do I save my phone's battery power? ............................................................................................................. 66
15.15 Will the indicator respond when my phone's battery level is less than 10%? ......................................................... 66
15.16 What can I do if my phone's standby time is short? ................................................................................................ 66
15.17 Why is my charger overheated when charging my phone? ..................................................................................... 67
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xx
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
15.18 Why does my phone generate heat when charging? ............................................................................................... 67
15.19 Why does my charger emit high-frequency noise in a quiet environment? ............................................................ 67
15.20 What can I do if my phone generates excessive heat during standby time? ........................................................... 68
15.21 What can I do if my phone can't properly display the battery level? ...................................................................... 68
15.22 What can I do if my phone fails to be charged? ...................................................................................................... 68
15.23 How do I preserve my phone's battery? .................................................................................................................. 69
15.24 How do I check the battery status? ......................................................................................................................... 69
15.25 How do I check the ranking of power-intensive applications? ............................................................................... 69
15.26 How long should I charge the battery for the first time? ........................................................................................ 69
15.27 What are the precautions when I charge my phone for the first time? .................................................................... 69
15.28 How long does it take to fully charge my phone? ................................................................................................... 70
15.29 Why can't I charge my phone after I connect it to a computer? .............................................................................. 70
15.30 Can I use a Huawei charger in other countries? ...................................................................................................... 70
15.31 Can I use a charger of other brands to charge my phone? ...................................................................................... 70
15.32 Will my battery's lifespan be affected if I play my phone while charging it? ......................................................... 70
16 Managing apps ..................................................................................................................... 71
16.1 Third-party apps ........................................................................................................................................................ 71
16.1.1 Why are the touch positions inaccurate when I play a game?................................................................................ 71
16.1.2 How do I view the version of Google service framework? .................................................................................... 71
16.1.3 Why can't I synchronize the contacts and calendar events from my Gmail account? ............................................ 71
16.1.4 Why can't I install a downloaded app on my phone? ............................................................................................. 71
16.1.5 Why does the system prompt for installation failure when I install a downloaded app? ....................................... 72
16.1.6 What can I do if the apps consume my phone's memory? ..................................................................................... 72
16.1.7 Does my phone support online banking for online shopping? ............................................................................... 72
16.1.8 Why does the number hop when I start the pedometer? ........................................................................................ 72
16.1.9 Why is the app lock invalidated after I restart my phone? ..................................................................................... 72
16.1.10 Why is there a deviation between the counting of the pedometer app and my own counting? ............................ 72
16.1.11 Which device is counting after I successfully connect my wrist band and my phone? ........................................ 72
16.1.12 Why can't I install some apps and why does my phone prompt "repeated permissions"? ................................... 72
16.1.13 Why is a third-party app still running after I close all the apps at the touch of a button? .................................... 73
16.1.14 Why can't some apps properly work after I recover my phone using the backup data?....................................... 73
16.1.15 How can I tell if the third-party software is compatible with Android 5.0? ......................................................... 73
16.1.16 Why can't I use some third-party apps on my phone?.......................................................................................... 73
16.2 System apps .............................................................................................................................................................. 74
16.2.1 Why can't I open the camera? ................................................................................................................................ 74
16.2.2 Why isn't the camera icon displayed on the home screen? .................................................................................... 74
16.2.3 Why are only a few FM radio channels available? Why do some FM radio channels have noise? ....................... 74
16.2.4 What will my phone do if it can't detect my voice input? ...................................................................................... 74
16.2.5 Why can't I use the voice input command "turn on Wi-Fi"? .................................................................................. 75
16.2.6 How do I disable the App Center update notifications? ......................................................................................... 75
16.2.7 Why can't I connect to the App Center? ................................................................................................................. 75
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
16.2.8 Can I set the app preview to icon preview? ........................................................................................................... 75
16.2.9 Why does my phone display another app when I touch the back button? ............................................................. 75
16.2.10 Why doesn't my phone trigger the location reminder even if I have set it in the Notes? ..................................... 75
16.2.11 Why is the Geo-fence function in the location reminder invalid? ........................................................................ 75
16.2.12 Why doesn't my phone trigger the smart travel function even if I have set it in the Notes? ................................ 76
16.2.13 Why is the GPS icon always displayed in the status bar? .................................................................................... 76
16.2.14 Why can't I save the videos and songs I have downloaded from third-party apps to the external microSD card?
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 76
16.2.15 How do I update, save, and subscribe the magazine unlock wallpapers? ............................................................ 76
16.2.16 Why can't I wake up my phone by double touching the screen when the screen is turned off?........................... 76
16.2.17 Why does my phone automatically delete some notification messages? ............................................................. 76
16.2.18 Why can't I send an SMS or why does my phone display that the SMS is being sent? ....................................... 77
16.2.19 Why can't my phone receive SMS on time? ........................................................................................................ 77
16.2.20 How do I use the voice navigation function? ....................................................................................................... 77
16.2.21 How do I make calls using the voice assistant? ................................................................................................... 77
16.2.22 Why can't my phone recognize my voice input? ................................................................................................. 77
16.2.23 Can my phone freely switch over among 4G, 3G, and 2G networks? ................................................................. 77
16.2.24 Why are the icons re-arranged after I unlock the screen? .................................................................................... 78
16.2.25 Can I use Huawei Health app without a wrist band? ........................................................................................... 78
16.2.26 What is Myfitnesspal?.......................................................................................................................................... 78
16.2.27 Why is the FM radio interrupted by the camera? ................................................................................................. 78
16.2.28 Why can't I choose the SIM card for making phone calls and why does my phone make phone calls over card 1
by default? ........................................................................................................................................................................ 78
16.2.29 Why can't my phone match the contact with the number in the SMS? ................................................................ 78
16.2.30 Why doesn't my phone play SMS tones? ............................................................................................................. 78
16.2.31 How do I cancel the notification message category? ........................................................................................... 78
16.2.32 Why can I read the multimedia messages only in slide mode? ............................................................................ 79
16.3 App interaction exceptions........................................................................................................................................ 79
16.3.1 What can I do if I can't open the pre-installed apps (such as call and messaging) on my phone? ......................... 79
16.3.2 Why does the third-party app installed on my phone encounter exceptions? ........................................................ 79
16.3.3 Why can't some third-party apps be displayed in full-screen mode? ..................................................................... 79
16.3.4 How do I clear the cache or web browsing history in the browser? ...................................................................... 79
16.3.5 Can I log in to the online bank account using the browser on my phone? ............................................................. 80
16.3.6 Can I connect to the network during phone calls? ................................................................................................. 80
16.3.7 How do I uninstall pre-installed apps? ................................................................................................................... 80
16.3.8 Why does my phone fail to install an app? ............................................................................................................ 80
16.3.9 How do I disable the auto-startup third-party apps? .............................................................................................. 80
16.3.10 How do I close background apps? ....................................................................................................................... 80
16.3.11 How to I set some applications not to exit after the screen is turned off? ............................................................ 80
16.3.12 How do I set the push notifications of the apps? ................................................................................................. 80
16.3.13 How do I use a third-party input method? ........................................................................................................... 81
16.3.14 How do I prohibit the background running of power-intensive apps? ................................................................. 81
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
16.3.15 How do I prohibit certain apps from reading personal data in my phone? .......................................................... 81
16.3.16 Can I uninstall Phone Manager? .......................................................................................................................... 81
16.3.17 How do I restore Phone Manager after I delete it? .............................................................................................. 81
16.3.18 How do I restore the deleted Weather app?.......................................................................................................... 81
16.3.19 How do I clean the app cache? ............................................................................................................................ 81
16.3.20 How do I add or delete the app shortcut in the simple home screen mode? ........................................................ 81
16.3.21 How do I search for an app on my phone? .......................................................................................................... 82
16.3.22 How do I cancel the update notifications of Huawei App Center? ...................................................................... 82
16.3.23 How do I move the installed apps to the microSD card? ..................................................................................... 82
16.3.24 How do I close the suspend window pushed by the app? .................................................................................... 82
17 NFC and payment................................................................................................................. 83
17.1 How do I use NFC to transfer files? ......................................................................................................................... 83
17.2 Why can't NFC recognize the bus card? ................................................................................................................... 83
17.3 Why is NFC payment insensitive or failed? ............................................................................................................. 83
17.4 Why does the POS machine prompt for payment failure although the payment has been successfully made? ........ 84
17.5 Why can't I make payment using my phone on the ATM?........................................................................................ 84
17.6 Why is the card access failed? .................................................................................................................................. 84
17.7 Can I swipe card using my phone when my phone is powered off or the screen is turned off? ............................... 84
17.8 Do I need to enable Honor Wallet when I swipe card using my phone? ................................................................... 84
17.9 How do I switch over the cards if I have activated multiple bank cards? ................................................................. 85
17.10 How do I use the card with NFC activated? ........................................................................................................... 85
17.11 How do I make payment using my SIM card? ........................................................................................................ 85
17.12 How does NFC function transfer files?................................................................................................................... 85
18 Backup, restoration, and update ......................................................................................... 86
18.1 What can I do if my phone automatically powers off or fails to power on after being rooted? ................................ 86
18.2 Why does the online update fail? .............................................................................................................................. 87
18.3 The update package is available on the entire network. Why can't my phone detect the update package? .............. 87
18.4 What can I do if my phone fails to download the available update package? ........................................................... 87
18.5 What can I do if the system update notification is still available after my phone has just been updated? ................ 87
18.6 Why does my phone display the parsing or installation package verification failure message after the update
package installation fails? ................................................................................................................................................. 88
18.7 How do I back up my phone data? ............................................................................................................................ 88
18.8 How do I restore data to my phone? ......................................................................................................................... 88
18.9 Can I back up my contacts groups? .......................................................................................................................... 88
18.10 What data can be backed up on my phone? ............................................................................................................ 88
18.11 Why can't I enable the backup or restore function? ................................................................................................ 88
18.12 What data will be erased if I restore my phone to its factory settings? ................................................................... 89
18.13 What data will be erased after my phone is updated? ............................................................................................. 89
18.14 How can I back up and restore my phone data?...................................................................................................... 89
18.15 How do I back up data to a microSD card? ............................................................................................................ 89
18.16 How do I back up contacts to a microSD card? ...................................................................................................... 89
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiii
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
18.17 Why doesn't my phone receive the OTA update notification? ................................................................................ 89
18.18 How do I permanently delete all the files on my phone? ........................................................................................ 90
18.19 How do I set my phone to automatically check and perform updates? ................................................................... 90
19 Fingerprint identification.................................................................................................... 91
19.1 Does my phone support fingerprint identification? .................................................................................................. 91
20 Dual systems ......................................................................................................................... 92
20.1 Does my phone support dual systems? ..................................................................................................................... 92
21 Others..................................................................................................................................... 93
21.1 Why does the vibration not strong when I enter a number on the dialer screen? ...................................................... 93
21.2 What can I do if I can't find a solution in the FAQs to the issue that I have encountered? ....................................... 93
21.3 How do I download the User Guide of my phone? ................................................................................................... 93
21.4 Why can't I view the User Guide in phone services? ................................................................................................ 93
21.5 Can I scan a QR code using my phone?.................................................................................................................... 93
21.6 Does my phone support 3D acceleration?................................................................................................................. 93
21.7 How do I know whether my phone has been rooted? ............................................................................................... 94
21.8 Does automatic time synchronization consume data traffic? .................................................................................... 94
21.9 Can I use my phone for recording? ........................................................................................................................... 94
21.10 Does my phone come with a protective film? ......................................................................................................... 94
21.11 Does my phone support mobile TV? ...................................................................................................................... 94
21.12 Can I browse or edit Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF files on my phone? ....................................................... 94
21.13 How are my phone ROM and RAM allocated? ...................................................................................................... 95
21.14 When does my phone display the notification panel or switch shortcuts if I flick down on the home screen? ...... 95
21.15 Can I move icons from a folder to another screen? ................................................................................................ 95
21.16 How do I turn on the scientific calculator? ............................................................................................................. 95
21.17 Can I quickly move icons to different home screens? ............................................................................................ 95
21.18 Why does the calculator still rotate after I set my phone's screen orientation? ....................................................... 95
21.19 Why does my phone still display English after I set the system language to Chinese Simplified? ........................ 96
21.20 Why can't the icons align with each other after I enable the shake gesture for aligning icons?.............................. 96
21.21 Why do I feel electric leakage or shock when I use the headset? ........................................................................... 96
21.22 How do I use the noise reduction headset? ............................................................................................................. 96
21.23 Why is my headset jack loose? Why can't I fully insert my headset connector into the headset jack on my phone?
Why can I only hear a background tune at a small volume? ............................................................................................ 96
21.24 Does my phone support the three-button line control headset? .............................................................................. 97
21.25 How do I obtain bootloader unlock permissions? ................................................................................................... 97
21.26 What do the different indicator colors mean? ......................................................................................................... 97
21.27 How do I improve the game fluency? ..................................................................................................................... 97
21.28 What can I do if water entered my phone? ............................................................................................................. 98
21.29 Are there any risks if I reformat my phone? ........................................................................................................... 98
21.30 How do I prevent personal data from being leaked from my phone? ..................................................................... 98
21.31 How do I set privacy protection? ............................................................................................................................ 98
21.32 How do I subscribe the favorite magazine unlock style? ........................................................................................ 99
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiv
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
21.33 Why isn't the magazine unlock wallpaper updated? ............................................................................................... 99
21.34 What functions does smart leather cover provide? ................................................................................................. 99
21.35 Why can't I set the incoming call to mute using the smart leather cover? .............................................................. 99
21.36 How do I end a call using the smart cover? ............................................................................................................ 99
21.37 Can my phone display multiple windows on the screen at the same time? ............................................................ 99
21.38 How do I rapidly align the icons on the home screen? ......................................................................................... 100
21.39 How do I adjust the font size of Notes? ................................................................................................................ 100
21.40 Does my phone support the counting function? .................................................................................................... 100
21.41 Does my phone support the countdown function? ................................................................................................ 100
21.42 Can I turn off the alarm using the volume buttons? .............................................................................................. 100
21.43 Will the alarm go off when my phone is powered off? ......................................................................................... 100
21.44 Can I use a nano-SIM card equipped with a card holder as a standard micro-SIM card? .................................... 101
21.45 Smart screenshot ................................................................................................................................................... 101
21.45.1 What is smart screenshot? .................................................................................................................................. 101
21.45.2 What are differences between screenshot using knuckles or composite buttons?.............................................. 101
21.45.3 Why does my phone suddenly take a screenshot when I use it normally? ......................................................... 101
21.45.4 How do I partially capture the screen?............................................................................................................... 101
21.45.5 Why can't I draw a track when I partially capture the screen using my knuckles? ............................................ 101
21.45.6 How do I disable smart screenshot? ................................................................................................................... 102
21.45.7 Why do I fail to partially capture the screen even if I draw a circle?................................................................. 102
21.45.8 Does smart screenshot affect the standby time of the phone? ............................................................................ 102
21.45.9 How do I share the screenshot using the smart screenshot function? ................................................................ 102
21.45.10 How do I save or cancel the screenshot using the smart screenshot function? ................................................ 102
21.45.11 How do I edit the screen partially captured using the smart screenshot function?........................................... 102
21.46 Speech awareness ................................................................................................................................................. 103
21.46.1 What is speech awareness? ................................................................................................................................ 103
21.46.2 Do all Huawei phones support the speech awareness function? ........................................................................ 103
21.46.3 How do I use the speech awareness function? ................................................................................................... 103
21.46.4 What are differences between standard wakeup keywords and customized wakeup keywords? ...................... 103
21.46.5 Why can I wake up my phone while my friend can't? ....................................................................................... 104
21.46.6 Why do I frequently fail the wakeup keyword practices? .................................................................................. 104
21.46.7 Why can't I wake up my phone using the microphone when I wear a headset? ................................................ 104
21.46.8 Why can't I wake up my phone? ........................................................................................................................ 104
21.46.9 Why can't my phone identify my voice instructions (making phone calls) although it can be woken up? ........ 104
21.46.10 Why is the success rate of finding my phone using voice instruction too low? ............................................... 105
21.46.11 Why can't I use a wakeup keyword fewer than four syllables? ........................................................................ 105
21.46.12 Why does my phone require me to register before using the speech awareness function? .............................. 105
21.46.13 Can I use a more complex voice instruction, for example, music or navigation? ............................................ 105
21.46.14 Why does my phone call a different contact when I input voice instructions? ................................................ 105
21.46.15 Why isn't the flash on after my phone responds to my speech awareness instruction?.................................... 105
21.46.16 Does the speech awareness function consume too much power if it is always enabled? ................................. 105
21.46.17 Why does my phone prompt "voice instruction failed to be identified" when I speak with others? ................ 106
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxv
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Contents
21.46.18 How do I choose the customized wakeup keywords to achieve a better wakeup experience? ........................ 106
21.46.19 Why is the wakeup keyword still in Chinese even if I have changed the system language to English? .......... 106
21.46.20 How do I enable the speech awareness function? ............................................................................................ 106
21.46.21 Can I set the wakeup keywords? ...................................................................................................................... 106
21.46.22 How do I set the wakeup keywords? ............................................................................................................... 106
21.46.23 What are suggested wakeup keywords? ........................................................................................................... 106
21.46.24 What should I pay attention to when I practice the wakeup keywords? .......................................................... 107
21.46.25 Does my phone only support Chinese wakeup keywords? .............................................................................. 107
21.46.26 Can I set the wakeup keywords in English?..................................................................................................... 107
21.46.27 Why doesn't my phone respond to the wakeup keyword? ............................................................................... 107
21.46.28 Why is the wakeup keyword practice failed and why does the recording screen keep being displayed (0/3)? 107
21.47 Does my phone support smart screen split? .......................................................................................................... 107
22 Product specifications (TODO) ........................................................................................ 108
22.1 Basic specifications of products in different standards ........................................................................................... 108
22.2 List of pre-installed apps......................................................................................................................................... 108
22.3 Bluetooth compatibility list .................................................................................................................................... 108
22.4 microSD card compatibility list .............................................................................................................................. 109
22.5 Memory partition .................................................................................................................................................... 110
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxvi
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
1.1 What can I do if the Bluetooth headset, Bluetooth car
kit, or the speaker fails to be searched or connected?
1.
Check whether the Bluetooth headset, Bluetooth car kit, or speaker is in the pairing mode.
For different devices, perform the operations according to the related instructions.
2.
Check whether the battery power of the Bluetooth headset or speaker is sufficient,
whether the distance between the phone and the Bluetooth device is within an effective
range (10 m), and whether any obstacles or interferences exist.
3.
Check whether the phone is connected to another Bluetooth device. If yes, disconnect the
phone and that Bluetooth device.
4.
Reset the Bluetooth device and your phone, and reconnect your phone to the Bluetooth
device.
5.
Refer to the usage of Bluetooth devices provided on the Huawei official website or
forum.
6.
If the problem persists, connect a phone of another brand to the Bluetooth device. Check
whether the connection is normal and record the model of the Bluetooth device (for the
Bluetooth car kit, check whether it needs to be installed in advance).
1.2 Why can't my phone automatically connect to the
Bluetooth car kit after the Bluetooth car kit is enabled?
1.
Check whether the Bluetooth car kit supports automatic connection (you can use another
phone to check whether the phone can automatically connect to the Bluetooth car kit).
2.
If the Bluetooth car kit supports automatic connection, perform the following steps:
Clear the history pairing list on the Bluetooth car kit; cancel the pairing between the
phone and the Bluetooth car kit on the phone; pair the phone and the Bluetooth car kit on
the phone; if the car kit asks you whether to set it as a preferred device to be connected,
choose to agree. Then, restart the Bluetooth car kit and check whether the problem is
solved.
3.
You can search for the similar solutions on Huawei official website or forum.
1.3 Why can't I listen to music using the Bluetooth
headset?
2015/03
1.
Check whether your Bluetooth headset supports music playback. Generally, monaural
Bluetooth headsets in the market do not support music playback over Bluetooth.
2.
Go to Settings > Bluetooth. In the available devices list, check whether the Bluetooth
headset has been connected to your phone. If no, reconnect your phone to the Bluetooth
headset.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
1.4 What can I do if the voice call made using the
Bluetooth headset is not clear?
1.
Check the model of the Bluetooth headset.
2.
Check whether the Bluetooth device can be properly connected to other phones for
phone calls. If yes, contact the relevant technical engineer to solve the problem.
3.
Make phone calls when signals are stable and make sure there is no building between
your phone and the Bluetooth headset.
1.5 Why can't I hear the navigation sound using the
Bluetooth car kit?
To play the navigation sound, you need to enable the voice channel on the Bluetooth car kit.
Press the Resources button on the Bluetooth car kit and check whether you can hear the
navigation sound.
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
1.6 Does my phone support the automatic call answering
function using the Bluetooth headset?
After the Bluetooth headset and your phone are paired, you can use the Bluetooth headset to
answer a call. Whether the call can be automatically answered depends on the functions of the
Bluetooth headset.
1.7 Does my phone support Bluetooth 4.0 BLE?
The Android 4.3 and later versions support Bluetooth 4.0 BLE.
Huawei series phones and Huawei Honor series phones use Android 4.3 and later versions.
Therefore, these phones support the Bluetooth 4.0 BLE.
Bluetooth 4.0 is a breakthrough technology in Bluetooth communications. This function can
be used to achieve various convenient applications.
Your phone supports Bluetooth 4.1.
1.8 Why can't I find the wrist band or other Bluetooth 4.0
devices on the Bluetooth settings screen?
Huawei phones do not support the locating and connection of Bluetooth BLE devices (low
power consumption and wearable Bluetooth devices) in settings.
To correctly use Bluetooth 4.0 BLE, perform the following steps:
1.
Download the app corresponding to the BLE device from Huawei App Center and install
the app on the phone.
2.
Open the app and search for the BLE device. After the BLE device is located, connect it.
1.9 Why can't I enable or disable the Bluetooth function?
This problem may be caused by the software system. You can update your current version to
the latest version.
This problem may also be caused by the phone hardware. You can restart your phone or
restore the factory settings to check whether the problem is solved.
1.10 Why can't I access the Internet after my phone is
connected to a Wi-Fi network over a router?
Ensure that the router is successfully connected to a network. If other phones can access the
Internet but your phone still fails to access the Internet, restart your phone or use another
router.
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
1.11 Why is the connection to the Wi-Fi network
interrupted?
Use your phone near the router. If this problem frequently occurs, restart your phone and the
router.
1.12 Why can't I enable Wi-Fi?
In Settings, turn off Wi-Fi and then turn it back on to check whether the problem is solved. If
not, turn on the airplane mode and turn it back off and then restart the phone to check whether
Wi-Fi can be turned on normally.
1.13 Why can't I disable Wi-Fi?
In Settings, turn off Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi cannot be turned off, restart the phone.
1.14 Why can't my phone connect to a Wi-Fi network
through a router?
1.
If the Wi-Fi hotspot is encrypted, check that the password you entered is correct. Note
that the password is case-sensitive.
2.
Check whether the Wi-Fi hotspot name or password has been changed. If so, obtain the
new information and try again.
3.
Make sure you are within the working range of the Wi-Fi hotspot; otherwise the Wi-Fi
connection will automatically disconnect.
4.
The number of connected devices may have reached the Wi-Fi hotspot's limit. Try
connecting to another available network.
5.
If your phone cannot connect to the Wi-Fi hotspot and keeps obtaining an IP address, set
a static IP address for it as follows:
For an encrypted Wi-Fi hotspot, on the Wi-Fi settings screen, touch the hotspot.
In the displayed dialog box, select the Show advanced options check box. Under IP
settings, touch the drop-down list box, and choose Static. Then, enter the IP address and
domain name.
Enter the password, and touch Connect.
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
Note: The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
For an open Wi-Fi hotspot, on the Wi-Fi settings screen, touch and hold the hotspot.
From the displayed option menu, choose Modify network. In the displayed dialog box,
select the Show advanced options check box. Under IP settings, touch the drop-down
list box, and choose Static. Then, enter the IP address and domain name.
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
After your phone connects to the Wi-Fi network, a Wi-Fi icon will be displayed on the
status bar.
Note: The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
6.
Check whether the MAC address filtering function is enabled on the router. If this
function is enabled, phones that are not in the access list cannot access the Wi-Fi
network. For details about configuration on the router, see the router User Guide.
7.
To connect to some public Wi-Fi hotspots, you may need to log in to a web page for
registration. For details, contact the Wi-Fi hotspot provider.
If the problem persists, restart Wi-Fi on your phone or restart the Wi-Fi hotspot device.
1.15 Why does the download task over a Wi-Fi network
stop after the screen turns off?
Measures are taken to save power of the phone, so that the download task is stopped when the
screen turns off. To continue the download task, perform the following steps:
1.
2015/03
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi. Then touch Advanced settings > Keep
Wi-Fi on during sleep.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2015/03
2 Skytone
2.
Select Keep WLAN on during sleep
3.
Touch Always.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
1.16 Why can't my phone connect to the router over the
Wi-Fi network and why does my phone fail to obtain an
IP address?
Check whether the dynamic DHCP address allocation is enabled on the router. Do not set the
DHCP duration to a short interval. The recommended DHCP duration is 2 hours or longer. If
the dynamic DHCP address allocation is enabled on the router, set a static IP address for your
phone.
1.17 Why does the Wi-Fi network speed become slow or
the signal become poor?
2015/03
1.
Do not touch the Wi-Fi antenna on your phone.
2.
If your phone is far from the Wi-Fi router or is isolated from the Wi-Fi router by a wall,
the signal strength is weakened, resulting in a decreased network speed or poor signal
quality.
3.
Make sure your phone's protection cover is made of plastics or leather instead of metal,
because the metallic protection cover blocks your phone's antenna signals.
4.
Check the specifications of the router. If the router supports 5 GHz Wi-Fi, place the
router at a higher position.
5.
Check whether other devices are transmitting massive data traffic, for example, using
Huawei MediaQ to watch TV or using the laptop to download movies. If yes, properly
arrange the network resources.
6.
Use the Speedtest or similar software to test the Wi-Fi rate.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
P8 Smartphone FAQs
7.
2 Skytone
Connect the Wi-Fi to the router near the router.
1.18 Can my phone be connected to an iPhone over
Bluetooth?
No. iPhones cannot connect to phones of other brands using Bluetooth.
1.19 Why does the call using the Bluetooth headset have
noise and intermittent problems?
1.
Check whether the Wi-Fi is enabled. If yes, disable the Wi-Fi and enable it again. Then,
check whether the problem is solved.
2.
Check whether a radio interference source exists, whether the Bluetooth headset is
beyond the working range, or whether obstacles (such as a wall) exist.
3.
Connect the Bluetooth headset to another phone and check whether the same problem
occurs.
1.20 Why doesn't the Bluetooth headset have any sound?
1.
Check whether the phone and the Bluetooth headset are connected?
2.
Check whether the Bluetooth headset does not generate any sound or cannot play music.
If the music cannot be played, check whether the Bluetooth headset supports music
playback. Generally, monaural Bluetooth headsets in the market do not support music
playback over Bluetooth.
3.
Connect the Bluetooth headset to another phone. Check whether the same problem
occurs. You can also search for the solutions on the Internet.
1.21 Why can't the Bluetooth car kit work after it is
connected to my phone?
1.
2015/03
Go to Settings > Bluetooth. In the available devices list, check whether the Bluetooth
headset has been connected to your phone.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
2.
Check whether the Bluetooth car kit is configured according to the instructions.
3.
Search for the solutions on the Internet.
1.22 When I flick down from the status bar and touch the
Wi-Fi icon, why is Wi-Fi enabled slowly?
Certain Huawei phones support 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency bands. The scanning duration
of these phones is longer than that of other phones. Therefore, the connection takes a relative
long period of time. After you touch the Wi-Fi icon, wait for a while and do not repeatedly
touch the Wi-Fi icon. You can also enable the Wi-Fi in the following ways:
1.
Go to Settings and enable the Wi-Fi.
2.
Add the battery control icon on the home screen and enable the Wi-Fi using the battery
control icon. The operation method is as follows: Press and hold a blank area on the
home screen to display a window; touch Widgets and drag the Power Control icon to
the home screen.
1.23 Why does the Wi-Fi switch become unavailable?
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi. Then touch Advanced settings. Disable
Scanning always available. Then, check whether the problem is solved. If not, restart your
phone.
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
1.24 Why is the Wi-Fi function automatically turned on
after I turn if off?
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi. Then touch Advanced settings. Disable
Scanning always available. Then, check whether the problem is solved. If not, restart your
phone.
1.25 Why can't my phone scan any Wi-Fi hotspot?
1.
Check whether the hotspot name is hidden. In the router settings, cancel the hotspot
hiding function.
2.
Use your phone to scan the hotspot near the router (3–5 meters).
3.
If no hotspot is found, restart your phone. If the phone still fails to locate any hotspot,
you are suggested to make a hardware detection on your phone at the maintenance
center.
1.26 Why can my phone scan the Wi-Fi hotspot only near
the router?
You can restart your phone to check whether the problem can be solved. If the problem
persists, use another phone to scan the hotspot. If this phone can successfully scan the hotspot,
you are suggested to make a hardware detection on your phone.
1.27 Why can't my phone scan a certain hotspot but can
scan other hotspots?
You can restart the router first. If the phone still fails to scan the hotspot, perform the
following steps:
1.
Check whether the router hides the SSID. For details about configuration on the router,
see the router User Guide.
2.
Detect the frequency and channels set on the router. Channels 1, 6, and 11 of the 2.4
GHz network are recommended. If the router uses the 5 GHz frequency, channel 149 is
recommended.
3.
Check whether the frequency of the router is set to 5 GHz. If yes, set the frequency of the
router to 2.4 GHz (only for the phones supporting 2.4 GHz frequency).
1.28 Why can't my phone scan any hotspot in other
countries?
The Wi-Fi configurations for phones vary by countries. You are suggested to use a local SIM
card and register with the local network.
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
(The specific country name is recorded for software modification).
1.29 Why is the scanned hotspot name displayed in
unreadable code?
The user name should be a combination of letters and digits. Do not use Chinese characters or
special characters in the user name.
1.30 Why does the Wi-Fi device list display the same
hotspot information without refreshing?
You can restart your phone first. If the problem persists, restore the factory settings.
1.31 Why is the confirmation button unavailable after I
enter the Wi-Fi connection password?
Check whether you have entered an 8-character password. If no, reset your router's password.
Change the encryption mode of authentication to WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK, and set the
password to contain eight numeric numbers. Then, try again. You are suggested to select the
option for displaying the password to check whether the entered password is correct.
1.32 Why can't my phone successfully connect to the
hotspot due to authentication failure?
1.
Check whether you have entered a correct password. Pay special attention to special
characters in Chinese or English. You are suggested to select Show password (the eye
icon at the right part of the password input box) to check whether the entered password is
correct.
2.
If the entered password is confirmed to be correct, change the router's password to
numeric numbers only, for example, 12345678.
3.
If the authentication still fails, restart your phone.
1.33 Why does my phone display the message indicating
that the settings are saved but my phone fails to
successfully connect to the hotspot?
2015/03
1.
Check whether protective measures are configured on the router, for example, MAC
address filtering.
2.
If no protective measure is taken, check the number of connected users on the router.
You can modify the Wi-Fi password of the router to filter other unauthorized users.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
P8 Smartphone FAQs
3.
2 Skytone
Restart your phone or the router.
1.34 Why does my phone fail to connect to a home Wi-Fi
network?
1.
Restart your phone or the router.
2.
If the problem persists, set a static IP address for your phone.
1.35 Why does my phone fail to connect to a public Wi-Fi
network?
The IP resources provided by a router on a public Wi-Fi network are limited. You can try to
connect to the public Wi-Fi network when only a few users are using the public Wi-Fi
network or at a place with fewer users.
1.36 Why does my phone fail to access the Internet after it
is connected to the home Wi-Fi network?
1.
Check whether other phones can successfully access the Internet. If not, check whether
the network is normal.
2.
Check whether multiple routers in your home are cascaded. If yes, correctly configure
the cascading network.
3.
If the problem is not caused by the above reasons, restart your phone or the router.
1.37 Why does my phone fail to access the Internet after it
is connected to the public Wi-Fi network?
1.
In the public areas such as KFC, Starbucks, railway station, or airport, you can find a
place with fewer users to try again.
2.
In the public areas such as hotels and restaurants, check whether the hotspots are
available with the hotel and restaurant staff. If yes, restart your phone.
1.38 Why does my phone fail to access the Internet after it
is connected to a private Wi-Fi hotspot?
2015/03
1.
When another device serves as a hotspot and your phone fails to access to the Internet,
you can check whether the device serving as the hotspot can successfully access the
Internet or whether other phones can successfully access the Internet.
2.
Set the Wi-Fi channel to channel 11 to avoid interference from other devices.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
P8 Smartphone FAQs
3.
2 Skytone
If the problem persists, restart your phone or restore the device serving as the hotspot.
1.39 Why does the network speed become slow after my
phone is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot?
1.
Check whether other devices are using the network at the same time, for example, using
Huawei MediaQ to watch TV or using the laptop to download movies. If yes, properly
arrange the network resources.
2.
Test the Wi-Fi rate using the Speedtest software.
3.
Use your phone near the router. Otherwise, the retransmission of lost packets decreases
the network speed.
4.
Do not touch the top part of the phone, especially the Wi-Fi antenna part near the volume
buttons.
5.
Make sure your phone's protection cover is made of plastics or leather instead of metal,
because the metallic protection cover blocks your phone's antenna signals.
1.40 Why does the Wi-Fi speed become slow after I
connect my phone to a Bluetooth headset or a speaker?
Both Bluetooth and the Wi-Fi work at 2.4 GHz frequency. Therefore, interference is generated
between them. You can remain one connection at a time. If you need to use the Wi-Fi to
transmit heavy traffic, for example, viewing an online video, you can disable Bluetooth.
1.41 Why is the MAC address of the Wi-Fi network
unavailable?
1.
The MAC address is available when Wi-Fi is enabled. If Wi-Fi is disabled, the MAC
address is unavailable. Turn on Wi-Fi and the MAC address is displayed.
2.
If the MAC address is still unavailable when you turn on Wi-Fi, reset your phone.
1.42 Why is the data service disabled after I turn off Wi-Fi?
Go to Settings > Mobile networks > Mobile data switch reminder and select Ask whether
to resume mobile data.
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
1.43 After I set my phone to disconnect from the Wi-Fi
network after the screen turns off, why is it connected to
the XX network after the screen turns on?
Optimization measures are designed to help the phone save power when the screen turns off.
You can set the phone to never disconnect from the Wi-Fi network during sleep.
1.44 What data formats can be transmitted over Bluetooth?
Pictures, audio files, videos, text files, web pages, or contacts can be transmitted over the
Bluetooth.
1.45 How do I send a file using Bluetooth?
1.
To share a file, go to Files, touch and hold the file. On the displayed option menu, touch
Share then Bluetooth to send the file.
2.
To share a web page, open it, and touch Menu > Share page > More > Bluetooth.
3.
To share a contact, go to Contacts, and touch Share contacts > Bluetooth.
1.46 Why can't I pair my phone with other Bluetooth
devices?
Your phone supports various profiles, such as A2DP, HSP, HFP, PAN, HID, OPP, and PBAP.
If the pairing device also supports these profiles but fails to be paired with, see the following
solutions:
1.
Your phone cannot detect other phones.
Solution: Check that your phone has Bluetooth turned on and is set to be visible.
2.
Your phone cannot detect a Bluetooth headset.
Solution: Check that your headset is set to be visible (entering the pairing mode). The
methods for setting different Bluetooth headsets to enter the pairing mode are not the
same. For details about the settings, see the user guide of the headset or search for a
solution on the Internet. Generally, when the red and blue indicators blink alternatively,
the headset enters the pairing mode.
3.
The phone cannot connect to other phones when sending files.
Solution: Check that the phone to be connected to can receive files and supports the
format of the file to be sent.
1.47 What protocols are used by Bluetooth functions?
The protocols used by various Bluetooth functions of Huawei phones are as follows: HFP
(making calls), HSP (making calls), A2DP (playing music), AVRCP (controlling music
2015/03
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
playing), OPP (file transmission using Bluetooth), PBAP (synchronizing contacts), MAP
(synchronizing SMSs), HID (using a Bluetooth keyboard and mouse), PAN (sharing a
network using Bluetooth), and BLE (connecting to a Bluetooth low-power-consumption
device such as a wrist band).
1.48 Does my phone support the Bluetooth APT-X
function?
Temporarily, the APT-X function is not supported.
1.49 Why can't I clearly hear the voice using the Bluetooth
car kit or Bluetooth headset?
Check whether the Wi-Fi switch of your phone is turned on. Perform the following steps
when Wi-Fi is turned off:
Connect the Bluetooth car kit or Bluetooth headset to another phone and check whether the
similar issue occurs.
Check whether noise is caused during the call because human body blocks signals or the
surrounding environment has an interference. If so, stay away from the interference.
1.50 How can I use the BLE function?
The Bluetooth BLE function is a new technology developed based on the low power
consumption feature of the Bluetooth. Generally, the BLE accessory manufacturers release
related apps that are used together with the BLE accessories, for example, BLE sports wrist
band, sports watch, balance scale, pedometer, and smart wrist strap.
1.51 How can I connect my phone to a smart BLE device?
Generally, the BLE accessory manufacturers release related apps that are used together with
the BLE accessories. You can download and install the corresponding app. Search the smart
BLE device using the app and confirm the connection. Then, you can synchronize the data
between the smart BLE device and the phone.
1.52 Why does the Bluetooth call have the intermittent,
noise, and echo problems?
2015/03
1.
The Bluetooth may have a compatibility problem. You can connect the Bluetooth device
to another phone to check whether such a problem occurs.
2.
Check whether the Wi-Fi of the phone is enabled. Check whether the voice conditions
can be improved after you disable the Wi-Fi.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
3.
Upgrade your phone to the latest firmware version.
4.
Search the reference solution on the Internet.
5.
If the problem persists, provide the information such as headset model, application
scenario, and software version to Huawei after-sales service hotline.
1.53 Why can't the Bluetooth headset display its battery
level?
Certain headsets do not support the display of battery level. Therefore, this problem is not
caused by Huawei phones.
1.54 What is Wi-Fi+?
In the EMUI3.1 version, when the Wi-Fi+ function is enabled, the phone detects the
connectivity of the Wi-Fi network, which may increase the traffic of the Wi-Fi network. The
major functions include:
1.
Based on the record of connected Wi-Fi networks, automatically enabling or disabling
Wi-Fi
2.
According to the signal strength of the Wi-Fi network and mobile data network, selecting
the best network connection (a notification is prompted when the phone is switched from
the Wi-Fi network to the mobile data network)
3.
For the automatic handoff between the Wi-Fi hotspots or between the Wi-Fi hotspot and
the data service network, providing the "Do not prompt" option on the notification
confirmation interface if you do not want to confirm the handoff each time.
1.55 How can I enable or disable the Wi-Fi+ function?
In the EMUI3.1 version, you can enable or disable the Wi-Fi+ function by choosing Settings >
Wireless & networks > More > Link+ > Wi-Fi+.
1.56 How can I restore the settings after I select the Do not
prompt option on the notification confirmation interface?
If uninformed automatic handoff bothers you after you select Do not prompt, you can select
Ask whether to resume mobile data in Settings > Wireless & networks > More > Mobile
networks > Mobile data switch reminder.
1.57 How can I set up a connection between my phone and
B2?
1.
2015/03
For the paired connection for the first time:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
After the B2 is powered on, the Bluetooth icon in the left upper corner of the screen
blinks, indicating that the phone is available for paired connection.
Enable the Bluetooth function on the phone and select HUAWEI B2-XXX
XXX in the
Bluetooth list.
2.
For the paired conn
connection for the second time:
−
After the pairing between the phone and the B2 is released, you can perform the
following steps to re
re-pair them: press and hold the side button on the B2 for 3s; touch
the Bluetooth icon
on the screen; when the icon starts blinking,
nking, enable the
Bluetooth on the phone and select HUAWEI B2-XXX in the Bluetooth list.
−
The B2 can simultaneously connect to two phones. To connect the B2 to the second
phone, perform the following steps: press and hold the side button on the B2 for 3s;
touch the Bluetooth icon
on the screen; when the icon starts blinking, enable
the Bluetooth on the phone and select HUAWEI B2-XXX in the Bluetooth list of the
second phone. (Note: At this time, the B2 is disconnected from the first phone. You
can select HUAWEI B2-XXX
B2
in the Bluetooth list of the first phone. When digit "2"
is displayed in the lower right corner of the Bluetooth icon on the B2,
B2 the B2 is
successfully connected to two phones.)
−
After the phone is connected to the Bluetooth device, open the Huawei Wear app and
enter the main interface under the guidance. Slide down on the main screen to
synchronize the data for the first time. After the synchronization is successful, the B2
time and information have been initialized. Then, you can use the B2 normally.
1.58 How can I reconnect the wrist band and my phone
after the Bluetooth connection is interrupted?
interrupted
1.
The wrist band is connected to only one phone
−
The phone actively disconnects from the Bluetooth device (disabling the Bluetooth
function on the phone or
or manually disconnecting the connection).
−
Within 3 min, if the Bluetooth function is enabled on the phone, the phone and the
wrist band are automatically connected.
−
In 3 min, the Bluetooth function of the wrist band is disabled due to expiry, and you
need to press the side button on the wrist band to enable the Bluetooth function. Then,
the phone and the wrist band can be connected.
Disconnect the Bluetooth connection in see-saw
see
manner:
2.
−
If the distance between the wrist band and the phone is restored within the specified
range within 20 min, the wrist band and the phone are automatically connected.
−
If the disconnection exceeds 20 min, the wrist band automatically disable
disables the
Bluetooth function to save power. After the wrist band re-enters
enters the Bluetooth
coverage area of the phone, you can press the side button on the wrist band to awaken
the Bluetooth function, so that the wrist band can connect to the phone.
The wrist band is connected to two phones
If the Bluetooth function of one phone actively disconnects from the wrist band,
band the
Bluetooth function of the phone is automatically connected to the wrist within 3 min. In
3 min, you need to press and hold the button on the headset for 3s and select the
Bluetooth icon to connect the phone and the wrist.
2015/03
Huawe Proprietary and Confidential
Huawei
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
18
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
−
Both phones actively disconnect the Bluetooth simultaneously.
Within 3 min, if the Bluetooth function is enabled on both phones, the phones and the
wrist band are automatically connected. If one phone is connected to the wrist band
but the other one is not, within 3 min, the second phone have 3 min to automatically
connect to the wrist band. If the second phone fails to connect to the wrist band in 3
min, you need to press and hold the side button on the wrist band for 3s and select the
Bluetooth icon to connect the second phone and the wrist.
−
Two phones are disconnected from the wrist band in the see-saw manner.
a. If the distance between the wrist band and both phones is restored within the
specified range within 20 min, the wrist band and the phones are automatically
connected. If one phone is connected to the wrist band but the other one is not, within
3 min, the second phone have 3 min to automatically connect to the wrist band. If the
second phone fails to connect to the wrist band in 3 min, you need to press and hold
the side button on the wrist band for 3s and select the Bluetooth icon to connect the
second phone and the wrist.
b. If the disconnection exceeds 20 min, the wrist band automatically disables the
Bluetooth function to save power. After the wrist band re-enters the Bluetooth
coverage area of the phone, you can press the side button on the wrist band to awaken
the Bluetooth function, so that the wrist band can connect to the phone. If one phone
is connected to the wrist band but the other one is not, within 3 min, the second phone
have 3 min to automatically connect to the wrist band. If the second phone fails to
connect to the wrist band in 3 min, you need to press and hold the side button on the
wrist band for 3s and select the Bluetooth icon to connect the second phone and the
wrist.
1.59 How can I reconnect a wrist band to my phone after a
failed connection?
1.
Release the pairing on the phone.
2.
Restart your wrist band.
3.
Restart your phone.
4.
Select the device in the Bluetooth settings to set up the connection again.
1.60 Why does the B2 and my phone occasionally keep
automatically disconnecting from each other?
If this problem occurs, check whether the Wi-Fi function is enabled on the phone. Generally,
this problem occurs when the Bluetooth function and the Wi-Fi function are enabled at the
same time. Because the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions share the antenna and use the same
frequency, the Wi-Fi function may cause interference on the Bluetooth function. You can reset
the Wi-Fi switch to solve this problem.
1.61 How can I use the B2 to answer calls?
1.
2015/03
The wrist band is installed on the wrist strap.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
Answering the call: Press the buttons on both sides of the wrist strap to take out the
headset, so that the wrist band can automatically answer the incoming call. You can wear
the headset to start the conversation.
Rejecting the call: Press and hold the side button to reject the incoming call.
Ending the call: Press the side button.
2.
The wrist band is not installed on the wrist strap.
Answering the call: Press the side button to answer the incoming call.
Rejecting the call: Press and hold the side button to reject the incoming call.
Ending the call: Press the side button.
1.62 What can I do with the missed call icon on my B2?
On the screen shown in the following figure, tab the phone icon at the bottom of the screen to
call back. You can also touch the arrowhead on the screen to cancel the notification for the
missed calls without calling back.
1.63 Why is the voice unclear or not smooth when I use the
B2 to make calls?
If this problem occurs, check whether Wi-Fi is enabled on the phone. Generally, this problem
occurs when the Bluetooth function and the Wi-Fi function are enabled at the same time.
Because the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions share the antenna and use the same frequency, the
Wi-Fi function may cause interference on the Bluetooth function. You can reset the Wi-Fi
switch to solve this problem.
1.64 How can I perform smart unlock using B2?
2015/03
1.
Go to Settings > Screen lock & passwords.
2.
Select Smart Unlock.
3.
Set the screen lock password according to onscreen instructions (if the screen lock
password has been set before, you can skip this step).
4.
After the password is successfully set, select a device for unlocking.
5.
Pair the B2 and the phone, on condition that the Bluetooth is in the pairing mode (see
FAQ 1 for setting the pairing mode. If the B2 has been connected to the phone, skip this
step).
6.
Select the connected device and set it as the device to be unlocked.
7.
After the screen is bright, you can slide to unlock the screen without entering the screen
lock password.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
1.65 Why does the B2
2 smart unlock function sometim
sometimes
fail to work properly??
The unlocking function is closely associated with device security. Considering the security
and convenience, smart unlock is implemented based on the signal strength of the Bluetooth
device. The unlocking range is controlled within 80 cm, to prevent others who take away your
phone from directly unlocking the phone. If the distance between the B2
B and your phone is
beyond this range, unlocking failure occurs with a large probability. Within this range, if the
B2 blocks signals, the signal strength is affected and unlocking failure also occurs with a
certain probability.
1.66 How can I use the B2
B to take photos using remote
control?
1.
Press and hold the side button on the wrist band for 3s to enter the menu screen.
2.
Slide down the B
B2 screen twice to enter the photo shooting screen:
3.
Open the photo shooting software on your phone.
4.
Touch the photo shooting icon on the B2 screen to take photos.
.
1.67 How can I find my phone using my B2?
You can locate your phone using the wrist band on the condition that your wrist band and the
phone are successfully connected and the Huawei Wear app is running.
1.
Press and hold the side button on the wrist band for 3s to enter the menu screen.
2.
Slide down the B
B2 screen to enter the screen for finding your phone:
3.
Touch the icon for finding the phone.
4.
The phone generates the music "I'm here, I'm here" (recorded voice of Lin Chi
Chi-ling),
helping you locate your phone.
.
1.68 Why can't I hear the voice in WeChat
We
when my B2 is
connected?
When the B2 and your phone are connected, the voice of WeChat is played over the receiver,
which may be taken for no voice played. You can place the phone near your ears to hear the
voice played over the receiver.. When you place the phone away from your ears, the voice is
played over the speaker.
speaker
2015/03
Huawe Proprietary and Confidential
Huawei
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
21
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2 Skytone
2
Skytone
2.1 Does my phone support Skytone?
No.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
P8 Smartphone FAQs
3 Smart cover
3
Smart cover
3.1 Why does my phone enter smart cover mode
sometimes I turn on the screen?
Your phone automatically enters smart cover mode whenever it touches magnet.
3.2 What can I do if my phone mistakenly identifies the
leather case and turns off the screen?
Use the leather case provided by Huawei only. The Hall sensor installed on your phone is
capable of identifying the opening and closing of the leather case. However, this function can
only work properly for the leather case provided by Huawei. Otherwise, exceptions may
occur.
3.3 Why can't I use the gesture to answer a call when my
phone is attached with a leather case?
To increase accuracy, the gesture functions with the proximity sensor. When your phone is
attached with a leather case, the proximity sensor is blocked. In this case, your phone is likely
to mistakenly answer calls because only the gesture is used for call identification.
3.4 Why does my phone automatically open its music
player when attached with a leather case?
Your phone enters smart cover mode once the leather case reaches a certain opening angle.
Music is automatically enabled in smart cover mode. Therefore, you may have accidentally
enabled smart cover mode when your phone is placed in your pocket because a human body is
a conductor that leads to screen misoperations.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
P8 Smartphone FAQs
3 Smart cover
3.5 Why can't I operate my phone on the transparent
plastic sheet after my phone is attached with a leather
case?
Your phone's touchscreen can only work with leather cases without the plastic sheet. In smart
cover mode, the touchscreen is as sensitive as without the leather case. When smart cover is
enabled, you can perform operations on the touchscreen wearing gloves.
Some leather cases attached with transparent plastic sheets that are sold on the Internet are not
officially customized and cannot work properly with your phone's touchscreen. However, you
can enable smart cover mode and try perform operations on the plastic sheet. Note that the
touchscreen may be not sensitive to your operations. It is recommended that you use the
officially customized leather case that can be purchased from Huawei's official website.
3.6 How do I switch to the clock style?
Touch and hold on the clock screen and flick up or down to choose a desired clock style.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4
Camera, music, and video
4.1 Why is the DTS effect not obvious?
Use a headset for better sound effect when you are playing songs.
4.2 Why can't I view photos I have taken before after I
open the camera by double pressing the volume down
button?
You may have set a security lock for your screen, which prevents you from viewing the
photos you have taken for the purpose of privacy protection.
4.3 Can I disable the shutter sound for snapshots?
Yes if you have turned off the shutter sound for normal photo shooting in Settings.
4.4 How do I enable the snapshot function?
Consecutively press the volume down button twice when your screen is turned off or locked.
Make sure the interval between the two presses does not exceed 500 ms (0.5s).
4.5 Why can I only view the current photo after I have set
the security lock for my screen?
You may have set a security lock for your screen, which prevents you from viewing the
photos you have taken for the purpose of privacy protection.
4.6 Why can't the headset provided with iPhone 4 work
properly for my phone?
Apple headsets are not compatible with your phone. Use the headset provided with your
phone or other compatible headset.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.7 Why does my phone play songs when I press the
button on my headset?
This is one of your phone's features. You can press the center button on your headset to
quickly open Music and play songs.
4.8 Why can't the optional headset work properly?
1. Check whether the headset is produced by Huawei and purchased from a trusted channel.
2. Check whether your phone displays the headset icon after you connect the headset to your
phone.
3. If the problem persists after you replace the headset, go to an authorized Huawei service
center and check the headset.
4.9 Why does smearing occur when I view photos in
full-screen from the Pictures folder in Gallery?
In Gallery, photo previews are displayed, which will be clearer after region decoding.
Therefore, some photos with rich details may seem smeared when they are being refreshed.
4.10 What can I do if the sound from the headset is
abnormal?
1. After you have connected the headset to your phone, rotate the headset to remove the oxide
layer on the headset jack.
2. Use the headset provided with your phone for the optimal sound experience. Non-standard
headsets may cause abnormal sounds.
4.11 What can I do if the other party can't hear my voice
when I am making a phone call using my headset?
1. Check whether you are using the headset produced by Huawei (with the insulation design).
Headsets that are not produced by Huawei may cause microphone short circuit, so the
microphone is muted, or the microphone may be mistakenly detected as a three-pole headset,
resulting in microphone failure. In this case, you may have to reinsert the headset. It is
recommended that you use the headset produced by Huawei.
2. If you are using a headset produced by Huawei, make sure you have properly inserted the
headset.
3. If the problem persists, take your headset to a maintenance outlet for check.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.12 Why is Music automatically opened after I inserted a
headset to my phone?
Make sure you are using the headset produced by Huawei. Headsets that are not produced by
Huawei may not be compatible with your phone (resulting in microphone short circuit).
It is recommended that you use the headset produced by Huawei.
If you are using the headset produced by Huawei and the headset is faulty, take it to a
maintenance outlet for check.
4.13 Why do I hear a sound when I shake my phone?
The sound comes from the autofocus motor of your phone's camera. Currently phones of all
brands use the voice coil motor (VCM) focusing system, the internal coil of which is secured
by springs. When you shake your phone, you can hear the sound of the autofocus motor.
4.14 Why is the ringtone of an incoming call suddenly
muted?
Go to Settings > Motions and gestures > Flip and check whether Mute incoming calls is
enabled. If so, the ringtone of an incoming call will be muted if you flip your phone.
4.15 Why does my phone automatically start recording?
You may have enabled the quick recording function. When you screen is turned off or locked,
double press the volume up button to quick start recording. Your phone vibrates when the
recording is paused or stopped.
To disable such a function, touch Tools > Recorder then the settings button to disable the
quick recording function.
4.16 How do I prevent my phone from charging the noise
reduction headset?
1. After the active noise reduction headset is inserted to your phone, your phone will
automatically charge the headset.
2. If you do not want your phone to charge the headset, press and hold the round button on the
AM180 active noise reduction headset, insert the headset to your phone, and wait for 1 second
before you release the round button. At this time, the charging indicator will be off and your
phone stops charging the headset.
3. However, If you set your phone not to charge the headset, the headset's microphone cannot
pick up voice. Therefore, the preceding method can be used if you are using the headset only
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
to listen to songs. If you want to make phone calls using the headset, you have to reinsert the
headset.
4.17 Why is the sound not stable when I play songs in
speaker mode at a small volume (two to three bars)?
Your phone is designed this way to bring you a better music experience. The sound details are
ensured even when you are playing songs at a small volume. However, your ear is so sensitive
to sounds that the changes of sounds at a small volume can also be sensed, which is a normal
phenomenon.
4.18 Why can I hear noise or current noise when I play
songs in speaker mode at the minimum volume?
1. The speaker is a large-power component, which is driven by a PA. When the volume is
reduced to the minimum, the PA is still working and outputting certain noise floor (similar to
a home theater at the minimum sound volume). When your ear is close to the speaker, you can
hear that noise, which is the noise floor of the speaker circuit. It is recommended that you do
not place your ear close to the speaker to protect your ear.
2. Your phone adopts the third-party sound effect commissioning algorithm in terms of the
speaker sound effects. When the volume is set to the minimum, the algorithm filter's deviation
will be output through the speaker, that is, the current noise, which is a normal phenomenon.
4.19 Why can't my phone play videos in MPEG-4 format?
The video file you are playing may be damaged or its coding is not commonly supported. You
can record a video clip and play it on your phone. The recorded video is in MPEG-4 format. If
the video is saved to the microSD card, you can copy the video to the internal storage and
play it to check whether the microSD card is damaged.
4.20 How do I modify the application that I use to share
photos?
Check whether any applications that can be used to view photos are installed on your phone,
because they may keep the sharing function of a certain application always on.
Touch Settings > Manage apps > Menu > Reset app preferences to restore to the default
settings.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.21 Why is the date in Gallery several years ago?
The default date of your phone is January 1, 2011. If you haven't modified or updated that
date, it will remain on your phone. If any photos are taken, the date of the photos will be the
default date, which is a normal phenomenon. It is recommended that after you purchase the
phone, insert a SIM card and register with your carrier's network to obtain the latest date.
4.22 Why is there light leakage around the battery cover
after I turn on flash?
To achieve a more crystal-like visual experience, your battery cover is attached with a
transparent PET film that has a light guide effect. Therefore, when you turn on flash, there
may seem light leakage around the battery cover, which does not affect your camera's
functions.
4.23 Why isn't music paused when I answer calls?
This is a caused by third-party applications. When the music focus is taken from the
third-party music player or applications by other applications, no pause control is made. To
solve this, update the third-party music player's version.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.24 Why isn't there a ringtone for incoming calls after I
set the volume to the maximum?
Third-party applications, such as WeChat, may occasionally block your phone's audio channel,
so other applications fail to normally display sound, such as incoming call ringtones.
Close the third-party application in question that is running in the background, or restart your
phone.
4.25 What can I do if I can't use the snapshot function?
1. Make sure your phone's screen is turned off.
2. Make sure no music is played.
4.26 Why are the photos I take in ultra snapshot mode not
as good as the photos I take in normal mode?
In some extreme scenarios, such as a dark environment or close-up shots, the shooting speed
in ultra snapshot mode is very fast, so the image colors and clarity of the photos are not as
good as those taken in normal mode.
4.27 Why can't I open the camera on my phone?
Some applications related to the camera, such as the flashlight, may have been opened. Close
those applications and try again.
4.28 Why is the volume of the recorded video small?
You may have recorded the video too far away from the recorded objects. It is recommended
that you record a video within 2 meters away from the recorded objects.
4.29 Why does it take longer to focus when I take photos at
a short distance from the object than when I take photos at
a long distance from the object?
Generally, users take photos one meter away from the object, so by default, your phone starts
scanning from the distant area. If the object is close to you, it is normal that it takes longer for
your phone to focus from the distant area to the object.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.30 Why is the photo focus unclear when I take a photo in
a dark environment?
Your phone may not be able to identify the details of the image in a dark environment. If the
focus area has no detail with obvious color contrast, the image is harder to identify, which
decreases your phone's focus performance. This is normal. You need to focus for several times
or manually choose the area with obvious color contrast to focus.
4.31 Why does the photo become vague after I zoom in?
When you are viewing a photo, your phone allows you to zoom in to a large extent. If you
keep zooming in until one image pixel corresponds to multiple screen pixels, the photo
becomes vague, which is normal.
4.32 Why is my phone severely overheated after I take
photos or shoot videos for a certain time period?
To achieve better image quality, your phone adopts a single-lens reflex level image processing
chipset, which consumes relatively much battery power, and your phone's capabilities of heat
dissipation is limited due to its size. Therefore, if you keep shooting photos or videos for a
certain time period, your phone will be obviously overheated.
However, your phone is provided with an overheat protection, your phone will not be
damaged.
4.33 Why are the photos I take using the front camera
reverse?
The mirror reflection function is enabled by default for your front camera. So photos taken by
the front camera are reverse, which are consistent with previews. If you want to save photos
of the actual scenario, disable the mirror reflection function.
4.34 Can I modify watermark images?
Yes, but you can only modify the several pre-installed watermark images by swiping left and
right on the screen. You can edit the watermark texts but cannot change the watermark
orientation.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.35 Why do I see a gap when I tilt my phone and look
into it through the flash lens?
The flash center overlaps with the lens optical center, which does not affect the performance.
The gap you see is attached with an anti-dust silicone cover to prevent dust from coming into
your phone.
4.36 Why do photos taken at night have speckled pixels?
For clearer dark details in photos you take in a dark environment, the ISO value has been
increased to increase the photo brightness, which at the same time enhances the noise. We
think it's better to increase the photo brightness for clearer dark details, regardless of the
noise.
4.37 Why do videos taken near lights have ripples?
The lights are powered by alternating current with a certain blinking frequency. If the blinking
frequency and the camera's scanning frequency do not match, ripples appear. Since the
commercial electricity frequencies vary by country and area, to realize compatibility, your
phone needs to identify the actual commercial electricity frequency in real time, resulting in
ripples if shooting scenes change. If your phone is near the light source or the shooting scenes
change during video recording, ripples may also occur, which is normal.
4.38 Why does my face look thinner and my eyes bigger in
my selfie?
Your phone provides a beauty mode, which automatically makes your face thinner, eyes
bigger, and more. When you take a photo using the front camera, beauty mode is turned on by
default. You can adjust the beauty mode settings from Settings.
4.39 Why is the photo of a moving object blurred?
A certain exposure time is required to take a photo. During the exposure time, if the object
moves and is captured by your camera, the photo is blurred.
4.40 Why is the image on the viewfinder blurred until 2 to
3 seconds after I open the camera?
When the camera is turned off, it focuses at an infinite distance. After you turn on the camera,
it will wait until the viewfinder becomes stable to start focusing. This process takes 2 to 3
seconds.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.41 Why does the photo of bulbs I take at night have
radial halo?
Your phone is installed with glass to protect the camera. If you touch the glass or make the
glass dirty, the radial halo occurs in the photo of bulbs. To eliminate the radial halo, wipe the
glass with a cleaning cloth.
4.42 Why is the photo of a night scene still dark even after
I turn on flash?
The LED strobe lamp has limited brightness, so sometimes the strobe lamp may not be able to
complement the brightness of the dark scene, which is normal. When you are using the flash,
do not block the light with your fingers or the decorations of your phone. Otherwise, the
photo you take may be blurred.
4.43 Why is the viewfinder red when I cover the camera
with my hand?
If the lights are strong and you cover the camera with your hand, the blood in your hand will
be reflected to your camera and make the viewfinder red. If the lights are weak and you cover
the camera with your hand, the viewfinder will be black.
4.44 Why is the photo taken with flash on blurred?
Possible reasons include:
1. You may have put your hand near the flash that reflects certain lights, resulting in bad
image contrast ratio. Try moving your hand away from the flash area and check whether this
problem persists.
2. Your phone's PC cover may be near the flash that reflects certain lights. Remove the PC
cover and check whether this problem persists.
4.45 Why do the photos I take with flash on have red eyes
or bright spots?
If the environment brightness level is low, pupils of human eyes dilate, and the light of the
flash passes into the eye through the pupil and reflects off the fundus at the back of the
eyeball and out through the pupil, resulting in the red-eye or bright spot effect, which is a
normal phenomenon. To avoid this, you can try staring at lights for a while to shrink your
pupils
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.46 Why can't I take photos at the resolution of 6 MP, 8
MP, 10 MP, or 13 MP?
Your camera supports photo resolutions up to 13 MP (4160 x 3120 pixels). If you want to take
photos at the resolution of 8 MP, 10 MP, or 6 MP, select the corresponding resolution first.
4.47 Why can't I find the photos I take after I set the
default storage location for photos to the external microSD
card?
The external microSD card may not have sufficient storage space and the photos may be
automatically saved to the pre-installed microSD card.
4.48 Why doesn't beauty mode work for burst shots?
Your phone does not support beauty mode for burst shots.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.49 How is the time displayed on the ultra snapshot
screen calculated?
This time value consists of the time taken to preview the scene, the time for automatic white
balance (AWB) and luminance stability,
stability, and the time for taking the photo. The major element
that affects this time value is the time for AWB and luminance stability.
Note: White balance makes digital cameras recognize the white color and balance other colors
under colored lights regardless
regardle of the surrounding lights. Colors are in essence the explanation
toward lights. An object that seems white under normal lights may not seem so white under
dark lights. An object that seems white under fluorescent may also not be so white. Therefore,
if white balance can be achieved, other non-white
non white colors on photos can be restored with the
base color of white.
4.50 Why does the video recording suddenly stop?
The recorded video file's size may exceed 4 GB.
4.51 What can I do if I see black spots and smudges on the
viewfinder
er after I use the camera for several months?
1. Wipe the rear protective lens of the camera clean and make sure the lens is clean. Also
check that the protective lens is not scratched by other sharp objects.
2. If you still see smudges, you may have
have dropped your phone and damaged the camera.
Those black spots and smudges may be caused by the scraps inside the camera. The camera
module is a precision component and cannot be opened, but you can face the phone screen in
front of you and hold your phone
phone with your right hand while keep your left hand unmoved.
Flap the phone against your left hand to shake the scraps outside the imaging area of the
camera.
3. If the problem persists,
persi ts, take your phone to a nearby maintenance outlet for repair.
4.52 Why is the photo focus unclear after I dropped my
phone to the ground?
The focusing assembly of your phone's camera is a precision component. If you drop your
phone to the ground, this component may be broken, resulting in focusing failures. In this
case, you can takee your phone to a nearby maintenance outlet for repair.
4.53 What can I do if I can't use the flash?
1. Set the flash mode to mandatory
a photo or shooting a video.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
. The flash will always turn on when you are taking
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
35
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
2. If the flash mode is set to auto
, the camera will turn on or off the flash based to the
ambient light. If you want to turn on the flash in a bright environment, enable mandatory flash
mode.
3. Check that your phone is not charging. Otherwise, the flash cannot be used.
4. Check that your phone has sufficient battery.
Your phone automatically disables flash when the battery level is low.
Charge your phone if necessary.
The flash may not turn on if your phone is overheated or the flash is too frequently used. Wait
for a while and try again.
5. Check
eck that scanning software is disabled. Otherwise, the flash cannot be used.
If the problem persists, contact Huawei technical support or take your phone to an authorized
Huawei service center.
4.54 Why are the photos blurred?
1. The camera lens may be dirty.
2.. If the photos are red and blurred with flash turned on, your hand might be too close to the
flash when you took those photos.
4.55 What are the differences between Super night mode
of my phone and long exposure of other phones?
Long exposure of other phones is
is based on pure physical exposure technology, which has a
high requirement for hand holding conditions. Due to low tolerance limit, overexposure in
bright spots is likely to happen. Restricted by the sensor and ISP, the exposure time will not
be too long, generally 8 seconds, and 30 seconds in extremely rare cases.
Your phone's Super night mode adopts a more advanced algorithm. Photos are generated by
multiple frames. The shooting time is not restricted in theory and longer exposure is supported,
dark sceness and even scenes that are not clear to human eyes can also be restored. The image
and noise reduction effects are better by the white balance technology after shooting.
4.56 What are the requirements toward the shooting
environment in Super night mode?
In Superr night mode, the shooting requires long exposure time. If your phone shakes too
much during the shooting, the image will be blurred. Therefore, hold your phone steadily or
use a tripod to facilitate the shooting. You are advised to stabilize your phone an
and use a
headset wire to control the shooting. A tripod is recommended to stabilize your phone.
Your phone's Super night mode adopts a more advanced algorithm. Photos are generated by
multiple frames. The shooting time is not restricted in theory and longer exposure is supported,
dark scenes and even scenes that are not clear to human eyes can also be restored. The image
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
36
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
and noise reduction effects are better than those achieved by long exposure using the white
balance technology after shooting.
4.57 Why do some areas of the photo in preview mode
seem red?
The size of your phone's camera module is small. In some light scenarios, the light incidence
angles are different, and some areas of the photo may have color differences, which is a
normal feature of the camera module. If the shooting effect is severely affected, take your
phone to a maintenance outlet for check.
4.58 Why is there an occulting stripe on the viewfinder
when I am shooting scenes with light color background?
Transparent treatment is added in your phone's UI design, which brings a painting stacking
effect and does not affect the display and photo effects.
4.59 Why are the photos seem red with a high saturation
degree?
This is a shooting effect of your phone. Red, green, and blue have high saturation degrees,
which can make your photos brighter.
4.60 Why do the brightness and color change when I touch
on the previewed photo?
When you touch on the previewed photo, your phone will expose according to the touched
areas, resulting in slight brightness and color changes, which is a normal phenomenon.
4.61 Why is the photo loaded slowly after I shoot it?
After you touch the shooting button, the image optimization program will take up a while to
achieve a better image quality, which is a normal phenomenon. The image optimization time
will be shortened in the future. It is recommended that you update your phone to the latest
version.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.62 Why are there white dots on the photos taken against
strong light?
Those white dots are bright dots caused by strong light refraction on the lens, which is a
normal optical phenomenon.
4.63 Why does the viewfinder have shadows or seem red
when I am taking photos with flash turned on?
The preview effect of the shooting application is not set to the optimal, which does not affect
the actual image quality of your photos.
4.64 If my phone has no microSD card installed, can I take
photos or shoot videos?
Yes if your phone has sufficient internal storage space because the photos will be saved to the
internal storage space.
4.65 Why can't I open some photos or videos on my
phone?
1. The phone does not support the file format.
2. The phone memory is insufficient.
3. The file is damaged.
4. The file is copyright-protected (for example, a .dcf file).
5. The phone does not have sufficient resources. Close some running third-party applications
and try again.
6. An unknown error occurred in the camera or the phone's OS. Restart the phone and try
again.
4.66 Where are my photos and videos saved by default?
Can I change the save location?
On the viewfinder, touch
in the upper right corner of the screen, then
to
display the settings menu, touch Preferred save location, and then select the microSD card or
your phone's internal storage as the preferred save location.
When the save location is your phone's internal storage, you can touch Files > Local >
Internal storage > DCIM > Camera to view your photos and videos.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
When the save location is the microSD card, touch File Manager > SD card > DCIM >
Camera to find your photos and videos.
4.67 How do I edit a photo or video? How do I add a frame
to a photo?
1. To edit a photo: In gallery, touch a photo to view it, touch the edit icon below the photo,
and then you can rotate or cut the photo.
2. You can perform simple editing on videos. Touch an area other than the playback button on
the video and the screen will display an edit button at the bottom. Touch the edit button to edit
the video with different styles.
3. You cannot add photo frames.
4.68 Does my phone support HD videos?
Yes. Your phone supports 1080p HD videos at 30 FPS.
4.69 Can I disable the shutter sound?
You can disable the shutter sound in Settings. The shutter sound changes with the system
ringtone.
4.70 How do I toggle between the front and rear cameras?
On the viewfinder, touch
cameras.
on the top of the screen to toggle between the front and rear
4.71 What video formats and sizes does my phone
support?
Your phone supports the MPEG-4 format. The size of a recorded video depends on the
available storage space in your phone.
4.72 What photo formats and sizes does my phone
support?
The image format of your phone is JPG by default. The size of an image depends on the
current image resolution and shooting mode.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.73 How do I switch between shooting modes?
On the viewfinder, swipe left and right to switch between shooting modes.
4.74 Why does my gallery display only the photos I have
taken?
Touch List at the bottom of the gallery to view photos from other folders.
4.75 Will my phone stop playing streaming media when a
call comes in? If yes, will it resume playing when the call
ends?
Your phone stops playing streaming media when you have an incoming call.
Your phone resumes playing streaming media after the call ends.
4.76 My phone cannot play some streaming media. Why?
The file format is not supported.
Your phone supports the following audiovisual encoding formats and file formats:
Video encoding: MPEG-4, H.263, and H.264
Audio encoding: AAC, AMR-NB/WB, ACC+, WMA, and MIDI
File formats: 3GP and MPEG-4
The network connection is unstable.
The phone memory is insufficient.
4.77 What might cause poor quality of online streaming
media played on my phone?
1. The source streaming media is of poor quality.
2. The network connection is poor.
3. Your phone's hardware may be faulty, for example, the display is damaged. To check
whether your phone's hardware is faulty, play a local video for comparison.
4. Your phone's available memory is insufficient.
5. The CPU usage is high.
6. Too many applications are running concurrently.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.78 Will simultaneously playing and downloading online
streaming media take up my phone's storage space?
No. When playing and downloading online streaming media, your phone uses its RAM rather
than its internal storage.
4.79 Why can't audio control of my camera function
properly?
You need to enable the audio control function from Camera > Menu > Settings > Audio
control.
4.80 Why doesn't the photo file name contain .pdf after I
saved it in PDF format?
The file name extension .pdf will be automatically added after you save the photo, but it is
invisible to you.
4.81 Why can't I view the screenshots but only photos I
have taken when I set Gallery in timeline mode?
This is designed for the following reasons:
In most cases, users only want to view photos they take in gallery.
On the timeline screen, touch the list button to display folders of screenshots and downloaded
images.
In timeline mode, you can flick down in gallery to take photos.
4.82 Why do photos still rotate after I disable the
auto-rotate function?
Photos rotate, regardless of the settings of the auto-rotate function.
Open Gallery, touch a photo to view it, and touch the menu icon then Settings. Then you can
use the first option to set whether photos always rotate or change with the system settings.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Issue 01 (2015/03)
4 Camera, music, and video
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.83 Why can't I search for lyrics after I enable online
lyrics?
When you are using Huawei Music to play songs, the default slogan will be displayed if no
lyrics are found.
4.84 Why is my phone's front camera deviated?
The assembly deviation of your camera complies with the industrial standards. The deviation
standard for your phone is less than 0.25 mm while the deviation standard in the industry is
less than 0.3 mm.) Such a camera deviation does not affect the camera functions.
4.85 Why are there no sounds when I play videos in MKV
format?
Your phone does not support audio in AC-3 and EC-3 formats due to patent restrictions.
4.86 How do I set the microSD card as my default save
location for photos and videos?
On the viewfinder, touch the menu icon in the upper right corner then Settings. Touch
Preferred save location and select SD card.
After a microSD card is inserted into your phone, photos and videos are saved to the microSD
card by default.
4.87 How do I set the radio to turn off at a scheduled time?
1. On the recorder screen, touch the menu icon in the upper right corner.
2. Touch the icon at the bottom of the screen to set a time for the radio to turn off.
4.88 How do I adjust the volume of the radio?
On the radio screen, press the volume up button to increase the radio's volume and press the
volume down button to decrease the radio's volume.
4.89 How do I add the location information to a photo?
On the view finder, touch the menu icon then Settings, and then turn on the location switch.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.90 How do I set a photo to display its shooting time and
place?
In Gallery, touch the menu icon then Settings, and then turn on Show time and Show
location.
4.91 How do I edit photos in all-focus mode?
Select a photo taken in all-focus mode, touch an area to focus in edit mode. The focusing is
finished when the touched area's viewing frame becomes green. After you save the photo, the
original one will not be replaced.
4.92 Why can't I shoot panoramic photos?
When shooting panoramic photos, follow the onscreen instructions to steadily and slowly
move your phone. If you move your phone too fast or the shooting direction is not correct, the
shooting may fail.
4.93 How do I take photos in macro mode?
Open the viewfinder, move your phone close to the object, touch the viewfinder to focus, and
then touch the shooting button to take a photo. If your phone is too close to the object, the
focus will turn red and fail. In this case, you need to adjust the distance.
4.94 Why is the panoramic photo discontinuous?
When shooting panoramic photos, follow the onscreen instructions to steadily and slowly
move your phone. If you move your phone too fast, the photo may be discontinuous. If there
are moving objects (walking people or cars) on the viewfinder, the photo may also be
discontinuous.
4.95 How do I modify the watermark texts?
Watermarks are supported on some models only. Your phone supports watermarks.
On the viewfinder, choose a watermark with texts and touch the dotted-line text box to modify
the texts.
4.96 How do I turn off flash?
On the viewfinder, touch the flash icon to switching between different flash modes.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.97 What is ISO?
ISO describes the camera's sensitivity toward lights. In dark
dar environments, if you use an ISO
of higher degree, brighter photos can be taken. If you use an
an ISO of lower degree, darker
photos can be taken.
4.98 What is white balance?
Photo colors may deviate when affected by environmental lights. Using white balance mode,
you can reduce that color deviation to the minimum. When shooting photos, multiple white
balance
ance modes that are pre-installed in your phone are available.
4.99 How do I turn on flash when shooting photos?
When you set the flash to auto mode, if the environment is too dark, the flash will
automatically turn on.
When you set the flash to be always turned on, the flash will be always turned on regar
regardless
of the environment.
4.100 How do I shoot a moving object?
Use burst mode if available.
4.101 How do I cancel scheduled photo shooting?
On the viewfinder, touch
> Settings > Timer and select Off.
4.102 Why can't some photos in Gallery properly
displayed?
The photos in Gallery can be displayed in list or in timeline mode. In timeline mode, only
photos from the phone photos
photo folder can be displayed. In list mode, all photos can be
displayed.
4.103 How do I view all photos in timeline
timeline mode?
Switch to list mode and move photos from other folders to the phone photos folder, then you
can view all photos in timeline mode.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
45
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.104 Why does the screen blink when I flick left and right
to view photos in full-screen mode in Gallery?
The photos are of high quality and to increase the loading speed, photos are refreshed twice. A
blurred photo will be displayed first, then it will be refreshed from top to bottom in square
area form. Therefore, if the photo has rich details, you can clearly see the refreshing process.
This is the mainstream photo loading method, which also applies to Google's original gallery
and other third-party galleries.
4.105 How do I find the photos and videos on the microSD
card after they are lost?
Files that are lost when the Android system is running due to exceptions (such as program
exceptions or exceptional power offs) will be collected to the LOST.DIR folder. Change the
file extension to .jpg to view the lost photos. Change the file extension to .mp4 to restore the
lost videos.
4.106 Why do the sounds of songs and videos come from
the receiver?
This problem is caused by WeChat video calls. Close WeChat from the background and play
sounds again. If the sounds still cannot be played from the speaker, restart your phone.
4.107 Why is the focusing time sometimes short and
sometimes long?
The focusing algorithm will readjust its processing if the environment, object, or the distance
from the object changes, resulting in different focusing time. It takes longer to focus if the
object's texture is unclear in a dark environment.
4.108 Why does it take a long time to refresh the preview
or stop shooting in Star track mode when I am using Light
painting?
Stars are small and not bright, so the exposure may a long time. The final captured star track
is obtained by multiple photos of long exposure. You have to wait for long exposure to finish
before you can refresh the preview or stop shooting.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.109 How do I switch between the four modes of Light
painting?
A button such as
of the four modes.
is available on the viewfinder. Touch this button to select one
4.110 Why are the photos I take using Light painting in
hand held mode are blurred?
Light painting adopts the method of long exposure and multi-frame integration. In hand held
mode, you hand may shake a little, affecting the imaging effect. It is recommended that you
use a tripod to facilitate your shooting.
4.111 How do I achieve good photos using Light graffiti
mode of Light painting?
Light graffiti requires two persons. When you are shooting in a dark room or an outdoor area
with no light sources at night, ask your partner to create light graffiti while you are shooting.
To shoot your partner, you can set a flash time. When the flash is about to turn on, ask your
partner to stay unmoved, then you can get a photo of the graffiti and your partner.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.112 How do I achieve good photos using Tail light trails
mode of Light painting?
It is recommended that you take photos on a top building or a bridge at night where cars are
moving fast. Check that the shooting time cannot be too long. Do not be too close to the
object for two reasons. One is that you will not be able to obtain long and continuous track
since the car light's track is short; the other is that the photo will be over exposed because the
car head light is too close and strong.
4.113 How do I achieve good photos using Silky water
mode of Light painting?
Make sure the shooting time is no longer than 5 seconds.
4.114 Why are the track lines thick on photos taken in
Light graffiti mode in a dark room?
It is harder to focus in dark environments. If the focusing is not precise, the graffiti source
becomes large, resulting in thick track lines on the photo. You are advised to touch on the
viewfinder to focus before shooting, during which time the flash will assist the focusing.
4.115 Why is the photo that I take using Light painting
white?
The four modes of Light painting use long exposure to form tracks, so there is a lower limit
for the exposure time. Overexposure may occur in bright environments. It is recommended
that you take photos in typical shooting environments of Light painting.
The typical shooting environment of Tail light trails mode is a place at night where cars with
their lights on are moving. The typical shooting environment of Light graffiti mode is a place
at night with no light sources or a dark room with a moving light source. The typical shooting
environment of Star track is an outdoor place at night where stars are shining in the sky.
4.116 Why isn't there any change on the viewfinder after I
touch the shooting button in Star track mode of Light
painting?
Stars move very slowly. Generally you need to wait for 5 minutes to see a short arc track.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.117 How do I use Director Mode?
This is a new feature of your phone.
1. After you enable Director Mode, you can create a group and set your phone as the host
phone to let other photos to connect to your phone.
2. Phones that are not Huawei P8 can only be the guest phones. On a phone that is not Huawei
P8, enable Director Mode, join the group, and connect to the host phone.
3. After guest phones successfully connect to your phone, you can see the screens of the guest
phones in the preview window at the bottom of your screen.
4. As the host, you can select an order from the menu in the upper left corner to move left or
down. You can also touch the screen to focus.
5. In Director Mode, you can edit videos and add music and titles to decorate your videos.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Issue 01 (2015/03)
4 Camera, music, and video
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.118 Where can I obtain Director Mode?
1. You can download it from Huawei App Center.
2. You can share it from your phone to a guest phone.
4.119 What can I do if the screen freezes when I am using
Director Mode?
If the screen freezes in Director Mode after the host and guest phones are connected, perform
the following:
1. Shorten the distance between the host and guest phones.
2. Use Director Mode in a place with few Wi-Fi hotspots.
3. Connect the host phone to one guest phone only.
4. If you have used Director Mode for a long time, turn it off and then turn it back on.
4.120 What can I do if the guest phone can't find the host
phone?
Go to Settings > Wi-Fi > Advanced settings and deselect Scanning always available. Then
turn Wi-Fi off and turn it back on.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Issue 01 (2015/03)
4 Camera, music, and video
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.121 What can I do if the guest phone can't connect to the
host phone?
Turn Wi-Fi off and turn it back on on both the host and guest phones.
4.122 How do I view videos taken in Director Mode?
You can view and play the videos in the Director Mode application and Gallery.
4.123 How to I remove a guest phone from the current
group?
Touch and hold the screen of the guest phone on your phone's screen, and touch OK from the
displayed dialog box.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.124 How long can the video be that is taken in Director
Mode?
Considering power consumption, currently you can shoot a video of up to 5 minutes in
Director Mode.
4.125 Can I use Director Mode to shoot videos when my
phone's battery level is low?
Yes, only if your phone's battery level is above 15%. If the battery level is lower than 15%,
Director Mode cannot be enabled.
4.126 Why can't other phones create groups in Director
Mode?
Only Huawei phones can create groups in Director Mode. However, we are considering
adding such a feature to other new phones.
4.127 Why does my phone generate heat after I use
Director Mode for a while?
Much power will be consumed when you are recording videos and transmitting data using
Wi-Fi in Director Mode. Therefore, your phone will generate heat after you use Director
Mode for a while.
4.128 Will Director Mode consume data traffic?
No. In Director Mode, a Wi-Fi hotspot is created on the host phone and shared with the guest
phones, so no data traffic will be consumed.
4.129 Why can't I add background music when I am
editing a video using Director Mode?
The video is not taken in Director Mode but generated from other channels, and it does not
contain soundtracks, so you cannot add background music to it. You need to download normal
video files instead.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.130 How does the host phone control the shooting on the
guest phone in Director Mode?
On the video recording screen of the host phone, there is a menu in the upper left corner.
When the screen of the guest phone is displayed on the preview window, touch the menu and
select an operation for the guest phone to perform.
4.131 Is the sound recorded by the guest phone or host
phone when the screen of the guest phone is displayed on
the host phone?
The sound is recorded by the guest phone.
4.132 Why does the original sound disappear when I add
background music in Director Mode?
It is designed this way. When sounds are recorded from the guest phone, noise may exist,
which may affect the sound quality once mixed with the original sound. Therefore, the
original sound will disappear if you add music to the video.
4.133 Why can't I use Director Mode on some phones?
The version of those phones may be earlier than Android 4.3, which does not support Director
Mode.
4.134 Why are the beauty effects of photos taken using
Perfect selfie different from those in beauty mode?
Beauty mode has fewer beauty functions that Perfect selfie. Using Perfect selfie, you can
adjust the skin color to make it redder and more natural.
4.135 Why are the faces seem red on the photos taken
using Perfect selfie?
It is designed this way. Faces seem red instead of white using Perfect selfie.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.136 Why is the photo taken using Perfect selfie reverse
compared to the preview?
You can select the selfie mirroring function in settings to keep consistency between the photo
and the preview.
4.137 What can I do if the focusing fails, shadowing
occurs, and the preview shakes when I take photos using
the optical image stabilization (OIS) camera?
Your phone supports OIS. Check whether the decoration on your phone's leather case or
protective cover is made of metal or magnetic materials. Non-magnetic materials are
recommended. In addition, check whether your phone has been severely dropped or placed in
a strong magnetic environment. If so, take your phone to a maintenance outlet for check.
4.138 How many axes are used for the stabilization of my
OIS camera?
Your phone comes with a 2-axis OIS camera, which is designed with consideration of your
phone's size.
4.139 Why can't the stabilization function work properly
on a bus or in the subway?
This is normal. Your phone is provided with the best compensation in the industry. However,
due to the limited stabilization range of your camera, when the compensation range is
exceeded, the stabilization effect cannot be guaranteed.
4.140 Why is the stabilization effect not as good as that of
a single-lens reflex camera?
Your phone comes with a 2-axis OIS camera, which is designed with consideration of your
phone's size. The single-lens reflex camera is provided with the professional lens, especially
the telephoto lens. Such a camera does not have as many restrictions as a phone, so it can
realize a 3-axis or even 5-axis stabilization effect with a wider compensation range. Therefore,
a better compensation effect is guaranteed.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.141 Why is the viewfinder blurred when I am shooting a
moving object?
The OIS feature of your camera compensates the shaking of your phone but not the movement
of the object. Therefore, if the object moves, the image may be blurred.
4.142 Why are the photos still blurred even if my phone is
provided with a OIS camera?
The OIS feature of your camera compensates the shaking of your phone but not the movement
of the object. Therefore, if the object moves, the image may be blurred.
4.143 What are the differences between the RGBW sensor
and the RGB sensor?
Compared to the RGB sensor, the RGBW sensor provides the recording point of the white
color, so more color information can be recorded. This feature brings better SNR in dark
environments.
4.144 Why is the image drifting in preview, especially in
digital zoom mode?
The OIS lens compensates the movement of your phone when you are shooting photos.
However, due to the limited precision of the movement detection component (gyroscope) and
the uncertainty of your phone's moving track, slightly unnecessary compensation will be
caused. Therefore, the image will be slowly drifting in preview mode or when it is zoomed in
to the maximum using digital zoom with your phone held in your hand, which is a normal
phenomenon that can happen in all phones in the industry, which are enabled with the optical
stabilization function in preview mode. If this affects your shooting, you can turn off the
optical stabilization function.
4.145 Why is the photo quality affected if I stop shooting
early in Super night mode?
When the shooting object contains a scene with obvious contrast, to ensure the image
brightness, Super night mode will adopt an exposure method similar to HDR to perform
multi-frame integration in the sequence from short exposure time to long exposure time.
If you stop shooting early, only the first few frames with short exposure time are integrated,
resulting in dark photos.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.146 What languages can be translated between one
another using the online translation function of my
camera?
You can translate between China, English, Japanese, Korean, Spanish, French, and Russian.
4.147 Does my phone's camera (EMUI 3.0 or later) support
online translation?
Yes.
4.148 Does my phone's camera (EMUI 2.3) support online
translation?
No.
Online translation is not supported on phones running EMUI 2.3 or earlier.
4.149 Can I edit the watermarks in watermark mode?
You can edit some watermarks.
When replacing a watermark, if you find the dotted-line frame blinking, you can edit that part.
4.150 What can I do if the photos taken using Light
painting are the same as those taken in normal mode?
1. Check that your phone is stabilized. A tripod is recommended.
2. Check whether the exposure time is too long or short.
3. Check whether you are using Tail light trails at night.
4.151 How do I use my camera to scan a QR code?
Aim your camera on the QR code and your camera will automatically scan the QR code
entrance. Touch to view details about the QR code.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.152 What are the special functions of Perfect selfie?
In Perfect selfie, you can set parameters in advance, such as skin whitening, eyes enlarging,
eye sharpening, and face lift. The beauty mode only applies to your face and makes you shine
in a group photo.
4.153 What can I do if my face isn't thinner using Perfect
selfie?
1. Check that you have set the relevant parameters properly.
2. Check that you have recorded three photos of yourself in different angles.
4.154 How do I use Director Mode?
1. Create a group on the guest phone.
2. Join the group on other guest phones (up to three guest phones are supported).
3. When shooting a video, switch to the screen of other guest phones on the host phone to
select the image needed for the video.
4. Edit the video after shooting.
4.155 What are the differences between the video shooting
in Director Mode and that in normal mode?
In Director Mode, you can switch between the shooting images of the four phones (one host
phone and three guest phones).
4.156 How do I shoot better photos using timer mode?
Timer mode is able to display the dynamic changes of objects that you have captured using a
long time in a shorter time. To ensure better shooting effects, you can use a tripod to stabilize
your phone.
The shooting time is extended to completely capture the changes of objects.
4.157 How do I improve the music quality?
In Music, touch Local songs and the screen will display the Upgrade song quality panel.
Touch Free upgrade. Then you can log in to the Huawei account and update all the songs to
the highest quality available in the library.
Note that the update requires network connection. Perform the update in a Wi-Fi network.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.158 How do I make photos clearer?
Your Gallery is provided with the filter to make your photos clearer and brighter.
In Gallery, touch the photo you want to modify. Touch the screen and choose Edit. Then
touch Filter > Demist.
4.159 How do I hide or cancel hiding albums?
Go to Gallery. Under Albums, touch the menu icon. Touch Hide albums and select the
albums you want to hide to hide them. To cancel hiding the albums, deselect them.
4.160 Why does ultra snapshot still work when the screen
is turned on?
In ultra snapshot mode, when the screen is turned off, you can double press the volume button
to take a snapshot. This function works when the screen is turned off for the purpose of
quickly take a photo without accessing the camera.
4.161 Why can't I find the photos I have taken in Gallery?
There are three tabs in Gallery, Photos, Albums, and Cloud. Check that you are on the
Photos tab.
4.162 Why can't ultra snapshot work?
You may be playing music and the volume buttons are occupied by the music. Therefore, ultra
snapshot is not available.
4.163 Why isn't sound coming out from the right side of
my phone when I am playing videos in speaker mode?
The right side of your phone is equipped with a microphone instead of a speaker.
4.164 Why can't my phone play flash videos?
Adobe Flash Player is not supported. So if the video file is in flash format, the browser cannot
parse it. It is recommended that you download a third-party browser to watch flash videos.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.165 How to I improve my selfies?
On the viewfinder, if you are using the beautification function for the first time, choose
Perfect selfie. Follow the onscreen instructions to set your personal beautification parameters.
You can also access the settings screen of the camera to enable Perfect selfie and set your
personal beautification parameters.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.166 How do I adjust the speed for time-lapse mode?
You cannot adjust the shooting or playback speed in time-lapse mode.
4.167 Can I adjust the focal length in time-lapse mode?
No. After you start shooting a video, the focal length must remain unchanged.
4.168 Why are the photos taken using Light painting
white?
There are four modes available in Light painting. Only Silky water can be used in the daytime.
The other three modes can only be used at night or in dark environments.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.169 Can I customize the shooting words for audio
control?
No. You can only use the shooting words that are provided on the audio control settings
screen of your camera.
4.170 How do I customize the shooting parameters of
Super night mode?
On the viewfinder,
nder, touch
ISO and exposure.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
> Super night. Then touch Auto to set the parameters for
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
63
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.171 Why can't Object recognition work properly?
Check the following:
Your phone is connected to a mobile network or Wi-Fi network.
The object is clear enough for recognition.
The whole object is circled on the Object recognition screen.
Object recognition requires network data. If the network data is not complete, the recognition
may fail.
4.172 How do I hide all photos?
In Gallery, the Hide albums function can also hide other folders than the phone photos and
videos folders.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.173 What can I do if albums can't be displayed in
coordinate format?
Check that GPS tag is enabled.
To enable GPS tag,, on the viewfinder, touch
Issue 01 (2015/03)
then Settings.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
65
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Issue 01 (2015/03)
4 Camera, music, and video
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.174 How do I recover the hidden applications?
On the home screen, touch the screen with two fingers together and then separate them to
display the Hidden applications screen. Touch
recover, and touch OK.
then the application you want to
4.175 What are the functions of Color correction?
Color correction is designed for users that have dyschromatopsia. Color correction can be
enabled under Settings > Accessibility. Then the specific correction mode can be selected
based on the actual situations.
Color correction is an experimental function that may affect some of your phone's functions if
enabled.
4.176 What are Object recognition?
When you are taking a photo of an object, you can use Object recognition to search for related
information about that object from the Internet.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.177 Does my phone support Object recognition?
Yes.
Whether Object recognition is supported depends on the phone.
4.178 Does Object recognition require network
connection?
Yes. Network connection is required to search for related information on the Internet.
4.179 Why can't my phone recognize the object I am
shooting using Object recognition?
1. The network connection may have encountered exceptions.
2. The photo may be blurred.
3. There are too many objects in the photo and your phone fails to locate the object to be
recognized.
4.180 How do I use Smart headset control to play music?
1. Touch Settings.
2. Under All, touch More under Smart assistance, and then touch Smart headset control to
turn it on.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
P8 Smartphone FAQs
Issue 01 (2015/03)
4 Camera, music, and video
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
4.181 Does my phone support Smart headset control?
Yes.
4.182 Can I use Smart headset control to control other
music players?
No. Smart headset control is only applicable to Huawei Music.
4.183 Why do sounds come out from only one side at the
bottom of my phone?
Your phone is provided with only one speaker, which is located on the left of the bottom of
your phone (with holes). However, the holes on the right of the bottom are only provided for a
balanced appearance effect. In fact, there is no speaker on the right.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4 Camera, music, and video
Holes with speaker
Holes without speaker
4.184 Why isn't OIS supported when I am recording a
video?
Your phone does not support OIS for video recordings. However, we will consider adding this
function in later versions.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5
Calls and contacts
5.1 Can I activate the calling function with the screen
turned off by pressing and holding the volume button
when my phone is connected to a Bluetooth headset?
Yes. You can also press and hold the call button on the Bluetooth headset to activate such a
function.
5.2 After I press and hold the volume down button, why
can't I activate the calling function with the screen turned
off after voice input?
1.
The operation may be incorrect. You should press and hold the volume down button and
input voice after a prompt tone is played.
2.
Your voice speed may be too fast. Slow down your voice speed and speak each word
clearly.
3.
Your voice may be too small to be perceived by the voice recognizer. Speak louder when
you are in a noisy environment.
5.3 Why is the call setup success rate low if I just say
"contact" with the screen turned off?
At present, this function is not supported and it will be improved in later versions.
5.4 Why is the call failed if I speak a contact with some
content in English when the screen is turned off?
At present, this function is not supported and it will be improved in later versions.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.5 Why can't I use a Bluetooth headset to activate the
calling function with the screen turned off?
Different headsets have different methods to activate the calling function with the screen
turned off. You may need to press and hold the call button for one type of Bluetooth headsets
while you may need to press the call button for another type of Bluetooth headsets. Choose
the correct method corresponding to the headset you are using. If this problem persists, use
headsets that are produced by famous manufacturers (such as Jabra, Plantronics, and Nokia)
and try again.
5.6 What can I do if the calling function with the screen
turned off doesn't work when my phone is equipped with
a SIM card?
1.
Check whether any contact number is stored in your contact list.
2.
Check whether the voice input is correct.
5.7 Why does my phone automatically make a call even if I
didn't input my voice?
If the calling function with the screen turned off is activated and you are in a noisy
environment, your phone will identify the noise that is loud enough as the voice input.
5.8 How long does it take to press and hold the button to
activate the calling function with the screen turned off?
Normally, you need to press and hold the volume down button on your phone or the call
button on your Bluetooth headset for only one second for your phone to display a voice
message.
5.9 Why can't I make phone calls when my phone receives
3G signals?
Your phone can only make phone calls in GSM networks. (3G networks are unstable.)
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.10 Why is my phone disconnected from the 4G network
when I make phone calls?
Currently, 4G networks support data services only and do not support voice services.
Therefore, when you make phone calls, your phone falls back from the 4G network to the 3G
or 2G network. If your phone falls back to the 2G network, you cannot use the data services.
5.11 Why can't I make phone calls or calls drop even when
the signal is strong?
Calls are not only affected by signal strength but also signal quality (such as the degree of
interference). Network resources can also affect calls. Generally, occasional call failures or
call drops are caused by bad network conditions.
5.12 What can I do if a message indicating that a voice
mailbox number is missing is displayed when I make a
phone call?
You can enter the voice mailbox number in Settings > Calls > Voice mailbox number. You
can get this number when you subscribe to the voice mailbox service in a service counter. If
you forget this number, you can call your carrier's service number (for example, 10086 for
China Mobile) and retrieve this number.
5.13 Why can't my dialer display phone numbers from
historical calls?
Your phone does not support such a function and the dialer can only display phone numbers
from the contacts.
5.14 Why can't I clear the notifications for new voice mails
by flicking down from the status bar to display the
notification panel?
Press and hold the notification, drag it to the left or right, and touch OK in the displayed
dialog box. Even though a message is displayed indicating that exceptions may occur in the
application if you forcibly clear this notification, your phone's functions will not be affected.
After you clear this notification, it will not be displayed again. A new notification will be
displayed only if you receive a new voice mail.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.15 Why do I frequently miss the phone calls?
1.
Go to Settings, under All, touch Privacy & security and check whether Do not disturb
mode is enabled. If yes, disable it.
2.
Volume up the ring tone to the maximum.
3.
Check whether your phone is in the mute or vibrated state for a long period time, or
whether you are frequently in the noisy environment when you miss the phone calls.
4.
Restore your phone to its factory settings.
5.
Update your phone to the latest version.
5.16 Why do I hear noise during phone calls?
1.
2.
If the noise is discontinuous and probabilistic, the causes may be as follows:
−
The network signals may be poor. Try making phone calls in areas with good signals.
−
Turn off the 4G network and then turn it back on. If the problem persists, the 4G
network may be newly constructed, which may not be stable.
If the noise is heard when the volume is large and is confirmed not to be caused by the
network environment, the causes may be as follows:
−
When you are on a call with the other party whose voice may be too large and your
ear is sensitive to that volume, you may hear noise.
−
If you are uncomfortable with the large volume, set the volume to a lower level.
−
If you find the receiver volume too small after you set the volume to a lower level,
align the receiver with your ear.
−
If you are in a noisy environment where you need to increase the volume, use a
headset or Bluetooth headset for phone calls.
5.17 Why does my phone enter airplane mode when a call
disconnects?
The airplane mode is mainly triggered in the following modes:
1.
Triggered using the shortcut switch in the swipe-down signal bar
2.
Triggered using the menu called by pressing and holding the power button
If you make phone calls without placing your phone near your ear, the airplane mode may be
incorrectly triggered in the signal bar before the proximity sensor makes the screen turned off.
You can move the airplane mode switch to the last on the switch list in the signal bar. To
move the airplane mode switch to the last on the switch list, touch the last icon on the switch
screen to access the user-defined shortcut switch screen.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.18 Why can't I receive incoming calls or why does the
calling party hear that the called party is in a call or is
busy?
The network may not be functioning properly. If this often happens, contact your carrier.
5.19 Why does the call ringtone stop when I press the
power button?
This is a usability design for you to quickly turn off the call ringtone if you do not want to be
disturbed, which is a normal phenomenon.
5.20 Why doesn't the call log in China Mobile versions
contain the call duration?
This design is especially required by China Mobile.
5.21 Why can't I answer or end calls on my phone?
According to general conventions, you can slide to the left to answer a call or slide to the right
to end a call. However, on Huawei phones, you need to touch the button in the middle and
slide it towards the green button (answer button).
5.22 Why can't I find a desired contact address if I use the
non-initial letter for the search?
In the current system, if you use the non-initial letter search method, you can only find contact
names.
5.23 Why is the number of contacts saved to my phone less
than the number of contacts copied from the vCard or the
SIM card?
When your phone copies contacts from the vCard or the SIM card to the phone storage, your
phone automatically merges duplicate contacts with the same names and phone numbers.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.24 Why are some call records of the same contact
combined, but some records of the same contact
separated?
Check whether you have stored multiple numbers for the same contact. If both mobile phone
number and home number of the same contact are recorded, the continuous call records from
the same number of the same contact are combined. Call records from different numbers are
not combined.
5.25 Why aren't the call records combined?
Continuous outgoing calls or incoming calls of the same number of the same contact are
combined in a call record. If other calls are inserted among these outgoing calls or incoming
calls, the outgoing calls or incoming calls are not continuous. Such a design allows you to
directly learn the call details. For example, five calls are made with contact A, a call is made
with contact B, and then a call is made with contact A. The call record shows contact A,
contact B, and contact A (five combined calls).
5.26 Why doesn't my phone display the contact photo for
incoming calls even after I have set the contact photo?
Check whether the same number is saved in multiple contacts. When the phone matches a
number with a contact, it selects the contact for whom the number is stored first. If the
number is stored in multiple contacts but you have set the contact photo for only one contact,
your phone may match the number with another contact. You can clear the contacts for whom
the number is repeatedly stored, especially the contact information in the SIM card (setting
photo for contacts in the SIM card is not supported).
5.27 Why do I hear echoes during the phone calls?
If you hear echoes of your own voice, exceptions may have occurred on the other party's
phone. When you hear echoes during a call with A, you can call B's mobile phone or fixed
phone and no echoes occur in the call with B. When you make the call with B, make sure you
and B are not in the same room and at least 10 meters away from each other.
5.28 Why does the phone ringtone volume automatically
decrease?
Your phone supports call gestures. If Pick up to reduce ring volume is enabled under
Settings, your phone ringtone decreases after you pick up your phone. To prevent the phone
ringtone from decreasing when calls come in, disable Pick up to reduce ring volume. If the
problem persists, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center to check whether
your phone has a quality issue.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.29 Why is the call discontinuous sometimes and why
can't one party or both parties hear the sound?
1.
The signal reception may be poor.
2.
If the signal reception of the peer party is poor, it may cause one-way audio. Change the
network mode to 2G (Settings > Mobile network > Network mode > 2G only. Then,
try again.
3.
Take your phone to an area with good reception. If the problem persists, take your phone
to an authorized Huawei service center to check whether your phone has a quality issue.
5.30 What can I do if the volume in speaker mode is small?
1.
Go to Settings > Sound > Volume to increase the volume.
2.
If you place your phone on a tabletop while you are playing songs, the speaker may be
blocked, resulting in small volume for incoming call ringtone and songs in speaker
mode.
3.
Try playing other loud songs, such as Huawei Tune, to check whether the volume of the
song itself is small.
4.
If the problem persists, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center.
5.31 What can I do if the playback volume of call records is
small?
The playback channel gain settings for calls and recordings are different. Increase the
playback volume when you are playing recordings.
5.32 Why can't the other party hear me or why is my voice
volume small during calls?
1.
If you are making phone calls in hand-held mode, your voice is received from the main
microphone in the lower left corner. Make sure this microphone's voice pick-up holes are
not blocked by your fingers.
2.
In hand-held mode, the dual-microphone noise reduction technology embedded in your
phone identifies the voice that is 10 cm from the primary microphone as noise and
automatically clears that voice. Therefore, make sure your mouth is within 10 cm away
from the primary microphone during phone calls.
5.33 What can I do if the receiver's volume is small?
1.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
You may not be holding your phone correctly. Make sure the receiver aligns with your
ear.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
2.
You may feel that the receiver's volume is small when you are using your phone in a
noisy environment.
3.
Check the receiver's volume in a normal environment. If the problem persists, take your
phone to an authorized Huawei service center to check whether your phone has a quality
issue.
5.34 Why do I hear noise when I play music using the
speaker?
1.
If the noise is similar to the noise you hear on some radio channels, this is a normal
phenomenon. When the speaker's volume increases, the signal-to-noise ratio decreases.
Try listening to the audio about 10 cm away from your phone. If there is no obvious
background noise, your speaker is functioning properly.
2.
Try playing the embedded ringtone. If the ringtone is normal, your voice source has
some problems.
3.
If the problem persists, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center to check
whether your phone has a quality issue.
5.35 Why do I hear noise in the downlink during a phone
call in the handsfree mode?
1.
When you make phone calls, do not place the speaker too close to your ear.
2.
Try playing the music in speaker mode. If the problem persists, take your phone to an
authorized Huawei service center to check whether your phone has a quality issue.
5.36 Why can't I store contacts?
This problem occurs when you log in to your cloud account. You can log out of the cloud
account and log in to it again. This problem will be solved in later versions.
5.37 Why is my phone powered off when I press the
power button?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Check whether the power button is stuck. If yes, take your phone to an authorized
Huawei service center.
2.
If this function is not enabled, check whether the power button gets stuck. If not, take
your phone to an authorized Huawei service center to check whether your phone has a
quality issue.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.38 Why can't I create a contact photo?
Temporarily, setting photos for contacts in the SIM card is not supported. You can
synchronize the contacts in your SIM card to your phone and then set photos for the contacts.
5.39 How many contacts can the phone store?
No less than 2000 contacts. The number of contacts that are stored in the SIM card depends
on the SIM card.
5.40 Why can't I make phone calls when my phone
receives 4G signals?
The priority sequence of frequencies selected by the phone is 4G, 3G, and 2G.
If you are at a place without 3G or 2G network, your phone cannot establish voice calls even
it can receive 4G signals. Take your phone to a place and try again.
5.41 Where are the recorded calls saved?
On the call screen, touch
and
to record the call. After the recording is finished,
a message is displayed indicating the save location of the recording files.
You can record your calls in the AMR format.
Save paths of recorded cal
calls:
Files/Local/Internal storage/Download
5.42 How do I switch between calls or merge two calls to
have a conference call?
If you are taking two calls simultaneously on your phone, you have the options shown in the
following figure.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
80
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
To switch between the two calls, touch
. To merge the two calls, touch
.
5.43 What does a card display when a call is coming
through the card during a call through another card?
When you are in a conversation using one card, if a call is coming through another card, the
screen displays the incoming call, and you can slide to answer it.
5.44 How do I view call logs?
Open a contact name card. Swipe down the name card to view the call log.
lo .
5.45 Why isn't a new contact in the Contacts although the
Dialer screen shows that the contact is successfully
created?
Touch the menu button on the Contacts screen, and check the settings of Contacts to
display.
5.46 Why doesn't my phone prompt for the specific card of
the incoming calls?
In the versions customized for China Mobile, the card of the incoming calls is not displayed.
5.47 Why does my phone suddenly dial a number?
By default, the quick calling function is enabled. When the screen is off, you can press and
hold the volume down button and speak the contact name after hearing the prompt tone. Then,
the phone can quickly make a call.
On the Dialer screen, touch the menu in the lower right corner and touch Call Settings.
Settings Then,
you can enable or disable the quick calling function.
5.48 How can I set the quick calling function?
To enable this function, perform the following steps:
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Touch the Dialer icon on the main screen.
2.
On the Dialer screen, touch the menu icon then Call settings,, and select Quick calling.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
81
P8 Smartphone FAQs
3.
5 Calls and contacts
Enable the quick calling function.
With the quick calling function enabled, when the screen is off, you can press and hold the
volume down button and speak the contact name after hearing the prompt tone. Then, the
phone can quickly make a call.
5.49 When my dual-card phone displays emergency calls,
why can I make calls?
Your phone supports dual cards. An exclamation mark indicates that the corresponding SIM
card is not inserted to your phone. In such a case, you can only make emergency calls.
Emergency call displayed on your lock screen is an entrance to the dialer screen where you
can only make emergency calls.
5.50 Why is the incoming number displayed as unknown?
If you do not activate the caller ID display service, the incoming call numbers are displayed as
unknown. It is possible that the caller ID display service is deactivated by the service provider
when you replace a new 4G card. If such a problem occurs, you can call the customer service
center of the service provider to activate the caller ID display service.
5.51 Why is the screen still off after I move my phone
away from my ear?
Your phone has a proximity sensor that is installed near the receiver.
During a call, if you place the phone near your ear or use another object to block the upper
part of the screen, the phone automatically turns the screen off to avoid misoperation. When
the phone is moved away from the blocking object, the phone automatically turns the screen
on to facilitate your operations.
If the screen is still off after you move your phone away from your ear, press the power button
and make sure the upper part of the screen is not blocked by another object.
Do not block the area around the receiver with the phone cover or other objects. When you attach a
protective film to the screen, make sure it does not block the proximity sensor. It is recommended that you
use a protective film dedicated to your phone.
5.52 How do I delete call logs?
On the Dialer screen, touch the menu icon then Delete call log.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.53 How can I delete the pre-installed ringtone?
You cannot perform this operation.
5.54 How do I export contacts to another phone using a
SIM card?
Go to the contacts list, touch Import/Export > Export > Export to Card 1 > Phone
(Huawei Cloud+sync off) in the menu. Follow the instructions to export contacts from your
phone to the SIM card.
Then, insert the SIM card to another phone. Go to the contacts list, touch Import/Export >
Import > Import from Card 1 in the menu. Follow the instructions to import the contacts
from the SIM card to your phone.
5.55 How do I export contacts to another phone using a
storage device?
1.
Export contacts in your phone to the internal storage as a .vcf file. Go to Files then the
root directory of your phone storage, and send the .vcf file to another phone.
2.
Touch the .vcf file on the other phone to import the contacts.
If your supports external microSD cards and you have inserted one into your phone, select SD
card under Settings > Storage > Default storage location to export contacts through the
microSD card as follows:
1.
Export contacts in your phone to the internal storage as a .vcf file.
2.
Remove the microSD card and insert it into another phone.
3.
Go to Files then the root directory of the microSD card, touch the exported .vcf file to
import the contacts.
5.56 How do I assign a unique ringtone for a contact or
contact group?
Ringtone cannot be assigned for contact groups currently.
To set ringtone for contacts, go to the contact information screen and touch Ringtone. You
can select a preset ringtone or music saved in your phone memory for the contact.
5.57 How do I assign a photo to a contact?
1.
You can only assign photos to contacts saved in your phone memory.
Go to the contact details screen, touch the photo area next to the contact name. From the
displayed option menu, choose a photo source, and follow the onscreen instructions to
select a photo.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2.
5 Calls and contacts
From Gallery or Files:
Open a desired photo and touch the option menu. Touch Set as > Contact photo and
select a contact saved in your phone memory. Adjust the photo according to the
instructions and save the settings.
5.58 How do I display the contacts in the SIM card?
Go to the contacts list and touch the option menu. Touch Contacts to display and then select
Show SIM contacts. Select All contacts.
5.59 Does my phone support video calls?
Your phone does not support video calls. To make video calls, you can install a third-party
application, for example, WeChat.
You are suggested to make video calls over the Wi-Fi network to save data traffic.
5.60 How can I cancel the keyboard touch sound?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Dialer touch tones, and
select None.
5.61 How can I query the missed calls?
Touch Dialer. On the Dialer screen, all missed calls are displayed in red.
5.62 How can I add multiple numbers to a contact?
In the contacts list, select a contact and enter the editing screen. Touch Add phone number.
5.63 How can I set the contact storage location?
On the new contact screen, touch the Phone or Card 1 above the contact photo to set a
default storage location of the contact.
5.64 How can I quickly find a contact?
On the contact screen, touch the search bar and enter the contact name or the first letter of the
contact name in Pinyin.
For example, to find contact Huazai, enter Huazai or hz in the search bar.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.65 How can I set the blacklist of the incoming calls?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Touch Harassment filter to create a blacklist.
Certain models do not support this function.
5.66 Why can't I hear the voice of another party during a
call?
The phone of the peer party may not have signals temporarily or enables the call silence
function. You can release the call and then call again.
Hardware faults such as the receiver also can cause this problem. Contact Huawei technical
support or take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center.
5.67 How can I bar the international calls?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Additional settings >
Call barring settings > Outgoing international. Enter a call limit password according to the
instructions and touch OK.
5.68 How do I return to the call screen?
On the main screen, open the notification window. Touch the current call task to return to the
call screen.
5.69 How do I make IP calls?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Touch Smart IP dialing, and select Smart IP
dialing. Then, IP prefix and Area code.
After the settings are complete, the phone automatically adds an IP prefix when you call a
remote number.
5.70 How do I activate the call waiting function?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Additional settings and
enable Call waiting.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.71 How do I forward all incoming calls to another
number?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Call forwarding settings >
Always forward. Enter the number for receiving the forwarded call and touch Activate.
5.72 How can I forward the unanswered calls to another
number?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Call forwarding settings >
Forward when unanswered. Enter the number for receiving the forwarded call and touch
Activate.
5.73 How can I forward the unreachable calls to another
number?
This function requires the support from the service provider.
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Call forwarding settings >
Forward when unreachable. Enter the number for receiving the forwarded call and touch
Activate.
5.74 How do I edit the text message for rejected incoming
calls?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Reject calls with SMS.
Edit a text message and touch OK.
5.75 How do I set the phone to automatically block
malicious calls?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings and enable Block calls that
ring once.
5.76 How do I delete a favorite contact?
On the contact screen, press and hold a favorite contact. On the displayed list, touch Delete.
Then, the contact is deleted from the contact list. You can also select Remove from favorites.
The contact disappears from the favorite list but still exists in the contact list.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.77 How do I remove a contact from the blacklist?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu and touch Harassment filter. Select the contact
and touch Remove.
5.78 How do I delete intercepted call and SMS logs?
Go to Phone Manager > Harassment filter. Touch Messages or Calls and then touch Clear.
5.79 How do I quickly mute the incoming call?
When a call is coming, you can quickly mute it by pressing the volume button or power
button.
5.80 How do I quickly dial a number?
On the speed dialing screen, set the phone numbers corresponding to each digit. Therefore,
you can press and hold the corresponding digit to make calls to the number.
5.81 How can I set the contact blacklist?
On the Dialer screen, touch Harassment filter. Open the blacklist to add the numbers.
5.82 How do I merge contacts?
On the Contacts screen, touch the menu icon then Settings. Touch Merge duplicate contacts.
5.83 How do I perform quick calling using my Bluetooth
headset?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Quick calling. Press
Bluetooth headset button.
After the Bluetooth headset is successfully connected to your phone, you can press and hold,
press, or double-touch the answer button or volume down button (determined by the
Bluetooth headsets). When you hear the prompt tone, you can speak the contact name to make
calls.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.84 Why doesn't my phone respond to the voice
instruction for quick calling?
Ensure that you input the voice instructions in the following formats and the contacts in the
instructions are consistent with those in your phone:
1.
Make a call to XXX.
2.
Call XXX.
3.
XXX.
4.
Redial.
5.85 How can I cancel the quick calling?
On the Dialer screen, touch the option menu. Go to Call settings > Quick calling to disable
the quick calling function.
5.86 Why does my phone fail to save a new contact?
If you have logged in to a cloud account, you can log out of the cloud account and then log in
again. On the Contacts screen, touch the menu icon then Accounts > Cloud Service > Log
out.
5.87 Why can't I select the SIM card for making calls?
Check whether you have installed third-party contact software such as 360 Phone Manager.
The attached keypad does not support dual-card dialing. As a result, you cannot select a SIM
card for making calls. You can uninstall the software to solve this problem.
5.88 Why does my phone end a call if I press the power
button during the call?
You can disable the call ending by pressing the power button function. To address this issue,
go to Settings > All > Accessibility > Power button ends call to disable this function.
5.89 Why does my phone vibrate when I answer a call?
This is a friendly reminder for call connection. Temporarily you cannot set this function.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
P8 Smartphone FAQs
5 Calls and contacts
5.90 Why are the imported contacts garbled?
This problem is caused by incompatible encoding format of the contacts and the system. You
are suggested to import the contacts in .vcf format. To solve this problem, perform the
following steps:
1.
Export the contacts in the attached contact application of the old phone to a .vcf file in
the storage card.
2.
Insert the storage card to a new phone and import the .vcf file to the phone using the
attached contact application of the phone.
3.
To import the contacts, on the Contacts screen, touch the menu icon then Import/Export,
and touch Import from storage.
5.91 How do I check the time of a missed call?
You can check the time of a missed call as follows:
In the call log above the keypad, touch the i icon at the right part of the missed call. In the displayed interface,
touch the arrowhead in the upper right corner. Then, you can view all detailed information about the missed call,
including the time and number of ringtone.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
P8 Smartphone FAQs
6 Storage and file management
6
Storage and file management
6.1 Why can't my phone access the Internet after I connect
it to the computer using a USB cable?
1.
Make sure the data service is enabled or the phone can connect to the Internet in other
ways.
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > More > Tethering & portable hotspot and
enable USB tethering.
2.
Make sure the USB cable is properly connected.
6.2 Why can't I find a screenshot?
The external SD card may have insufficient capacity. You can set the SD card as the default
storage in Settings > Storage.
6.3 When the storage card is full, why can't I open an app?
The Android operating system is installed in the system partition of the pre-installed microSD
card. When the RAM of the phone is insufficient, the operating system allocates another space
beyond the system partition as the exchange space, to realize exchanges between your phone's
internal storage space and the exchange space. If the microSD card is full, it can't provide
sufficient exchange space for process exchanging in or out. In such a condition, a process that
requires a large memory space may be abnormal. You can delete some content from the
microSD card and restart your phone to solve this problem.
6.4 Can I install a microSD card to my phone?
Yes, your phone's upper card tray supports the microSD card.
6.5 Why are some files copied before my phone's update
process starts using a USB flash drive?
When you are updating your phone using a USB flash drive, you are updating your phone
using the microSD card. At the beginning, the dload folder (including the UPDATE.APP
update package) in the USB flash drive is copied to the root directory of the pre-installed
microSD card, and then the normal update process using the microSD card starts.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
P8 Smartphone FAQs
6 Storage and file management
6.6 After two phones are connected and set, why can't my
phone display a tab of USB options?
The OTG cable and the USB cable may be reversely connected. The OTG cable should be
connected to auxiliary test phone B and the USB cable should be connected to primary test
phone A.
6.7 Why does the Manage apps show that my phone's
memory is less than 2 GB or 3 GB?
A certain part of your phone's internal storage space is reserved for the cache of the modem,
camera, and GPU, which is not managed on the Android system. Such an arrangement is
beneficial for implementing the phone functions. Your phone's actual RAM is still 2 GB or
3 GB.
6.8 Why is some of my phone's memory still occupied
after I clear all the recently used applications?
After you use your phone for a long period of time, various applications create a lot of
background service processes. The system needs to save these processes, and therefore these
applications are not stopped or terminated when the available memory is sufficient. Compared
with the memory usage upon system startup, there is a memory difference for 100 MB to 200
MB or more.
6.9 Why doesn't my phone display any notification after I
connect it to the computer?
After you connect your phone to a computer using the USB cable, if no notification is
displayed, check whether you have selected the Do not prompt option before. If yes, modify
this setting in the drop-down menu.
6.10 Why can't my phone detect certain microSD cards?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Your microSD card may not be produced by a trusted manufacturer (such as Kingston or
SanDisk), which may not be compatible with your phone.
2.
Huawei phones do not support non-standard microSD cards. Compared with the standard
microSD cards, there is a metal plate on the non-standard microSD cards, used to
provide other functions except for the storage function. If you use such a type of
microSD card, you can paste the extra metal plate with gummed paper (the thickness is
about 0.1 mm), and therefore you can use this microSD card normally.
3.
Format the microSD card on your phone (with the help of Huawei technical support
engineers).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
P8 Smartphone FAQs
4.
6 Storage and file management
The compatibility of Huawei phones with the microSD cards will be improved in new
versions.
6.11 Why can't I perform USB debugging?
Go to Settings > About phone. Tap the build number for seven times in rapid succession to
enter the developer mode. Then, enable the USB debugging mode.
6.12 After I enable the USB debugging mode, why can't
my phone connect to the computer?
Go to Settings > Developer options. Disable the USB debugging mode and disable the
Developer options. Restart your phone.
6.13 How do I check the available storage in the phone
memory and microSD card?
Go to Setting > Storage and check the available storage space under Phone storage and SD
card.
6.14 What functions are provided by the prompted options
after I connect my phone to the computer?
You can connect your phone to a computer using a USB cable to view content in the microSD
card but not your phone's internal storage.
The following USB connection methods are available:
Media device (MTP): MTP stands for Media Transfer Protocol. In this mode, you can
synchronize media files between your phone and a computer that supports MTP. If you
connect your phone to a Mac system, you can manage files on your phone using MTP.
PC Suite (HiSuite): In this mode, you can use HiSuite on your computer to manage the
photos, songs, messages, contacts, and applications on your phone.
Note: When your phone is connected to a Mac, you can manage files on your phone using
MTP, but the dial-up connection function on the Mac is currently unavailable.
6.15 Where are my files saved by default?
1.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Files received through Bluetooth are saved to the Bluetooth folder in Files.
2.
Photos and videos are saved to the DCIM folder in Files.
3.
Screenshots are saved to the Pictures folder in Files.
4.
Recordings are saved to the Recordings folder in Files.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
P8 Smartphone FAQs
6 Storage and file management
6.16 How do I format the internal storage?
Go to Settings > Backup & reset > Factory data reset. Touch Erase internal storage, and
then touch Reset phone.
6.17 Why is the data in the microSD card lost after I
remove the microSD card?
Before you remove a microSD card, uninstall it or turn off your phone first. Otherwise, data in
the microSD card will be lost. Lost data can't be restored.
Go to Settings > Storage. Choose to format the microSD card. Then, remove the microSD
card carefully.
6.18 How can I format a microSD card?
Go to Settings > Storage > Format microSD card. Confirm the operation to delete all data
in the microSD card.
6.19 Can I manage files by categories?
In Files, access the category tab. Files are categorized as audios, videos, photos, documents,
compression packages, and installation packages to facilitate file management.
6.20 How can I view the phone information?
Go to Settings > About phone. You can view the related information of the phone such as
model, processor, memory, storage, and resolution.
6.21 After I access the gallery with a keyboard connected,
why can't I view the specific album using the Down
button?
The albums are created using Android's original OpenGL, and they are not controls.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
P8 Smartphone FAQs
7 Smart IR
7
Smart IR
7.1 Does my phone support the Smart IR function?
No.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
P8 Smartphone FAQs
8 Location service and navigation
8
Location service and navigation
8.1 Why does the GPS positioning function fail?
To enable it, go to Phone Manager > Permission manager > Access location info, and
enable the GPS application's permission, for example, a map.
Use the GPS function in an open area. When using the GPS function, you can enable the
WLAN and data service to improve the positioning accuracy.
8.2 Why can't the GPS of my phone search for a satellite?
1.
Make sure you are not in a built-up area (for example, a room on level 1 of a tall building,
a small area surrounded by tall buildings, or an underground garage) because tall
buildings block the satellite signals. Bring your phone to an outdoor area and enable your
data services to help quickly receive GPS signals. Do not touch the upper right corner of
your phone where the GPS antenna is installed.
2.
Make sure your phone's protection cover is made of plastics or leather instead of metal,
because the metallic protection cover blocks your phone's antenna signals.
8.3 Why can't a third-party application map load the map
data?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Ensure that the network connection is normal. Otherwise, slow network speed results in
slow data loading.
2.
Remove your microSD card. Your phone is running Android 5.0 and the third-party map
application may not have the write right to your microSD card, so this application can't
load map data to your microSD card.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
P8 Smartphone FAQs
8 Location service and navigation
8.4 Why is the location information of the third-party
positioning application inconsistent with the actual
situation?
The location information of a third-party positioning application is provided by the third-party
application provider if there is no GPS signals available, resulting in incorrect positioning
results. Use another similar application and try again. You can also take your phone to an open
area and try again.
8.5 Why does the GPS icon occasionally appear on the
status bar?
Certain applications using the location information may enable or periodically call the GPS
function (for example, a weather application).
Go to Settings > All > Permission manager > Access location info. Check whether the
corresponding applications access the location information.
8.6 Why is the compass inaccurate?
The compass may not be calibrated. You can open a compass application (map or compass)
and move your phone in an 8-pattern.
8.7 Does my phone support the BeiDou Navigation
Satellite System and how do I check whether the BeiDou
Navigation Satellite System is running?
Only Huawei Honor 6 Plus and the products released in 2015 support the BeiDou Navigation
Satellite System. You can install the GPS Test software on your phone and check the satellite
search result. If the satellite ID is larger than 200, your phone is using the BeiDou Navigation
Satellite System.
8.8 Is the GPS function charged?
The GPS function does not require the mobile network. Therefore, it is not charged.
If you enable the mobile network or WLAN, the GPS positioning can become more accurate.
However, Internet access is required when you browse through the map or plan a route, which
may incur data usage fees. You are suggested to download an offline map package.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
P8 Smartphone FAQs
8 Location service and navigation
8.9 How can I enable GPS?
Flick down the notification bar and touch the GPS icon. Then, you can enable or disable the
GPS.
To make the GPS more accurate and power-saving,
power
go to Settings, touch Location access or
Location mode,, and set the location method according to your requirements, for example,
using the WLAN, mobile network, or A-GPS.
A
The figures are for your reference
ref
only. The actual screens may vary.
8.10 What is GPS?
The GPS stands for Global Positioning System that uses the satellites for positioning and
navigation globally.
8.11 How can I strengthen the GPS signals?
1.
Try using the GPS function in an open area to ensure
ensure normal signal transmission.
2.
When you use the GPS function in a car, place your phone near the front window of the
car.
8.12 What are the GPS working principles?
The phone sends its location information (latitude and longitude coordinates) to the
positioning background through the self
self-attached
attached GPS module. Then, the positioning
background calculates the coordinates in the electronic map and marks the positioned object
on the map, which visually shows the current geographical location of the phone.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
97
P8 Smartphone FAQs
8 Location service and navigation
8.13 What are the
e differences between the GPS and the
base station positioning?
For the GPS, the phone sends its location information to the positioning background through
the self-attached
attached GPS module, and the positioning background performs positioning. For the
base station
ion positioning, the base station of the telecommunications service provider
determines the phone's location by calculating the distance between the base station and the
phone.
The GPS uses the satellites for positioning, which consumes more power but is more accurate.
The GPS does not work when the phone is indoor. The accuracy of the base station
positioning is lower, but positioning is supported indoors.
indoor
8.14 How can I prohibit an application from acquiring
personal location information?
Go to Settings > Location access and disable Network location.
You can also use Phone Manager to protect your privacy. Go to Phone Manager > Permission
manager > Rights > Access location info.. Then, prohibit the corresponding application to
access the location information.
informatio
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
98
P8 Smartphone FAQs
9 SIM card and appearance
9
SIM card and appearance
9.1 Why does my phone read the contacts from the SIM
card slowly?
The reading speed of the contacts on the SIM card is affected by the SIM card performance
and the number of contacts. Generally, the reading time increases with the number of contacts.
If you are using a 4G card that supports multiple numbers for one contact, the reading speed
will be slow too.
9.2 Why can't a non-standard SIM card be inserted into the
card tray?
Your phone's SIM card thickness is designed based on the industry standards. Non-standard
cards can't be inserted into the card tray because they may damage the card tray. You are
suggested to use a standard SIM card. Do not use card tray adapters.
9.3 Why can't my phone detect the SIM card?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Check whether your phone model and the SIM card type are compatible and whether the
settings of the primary and secondary cards are correct.
2.
Restart your phone after you insert the SIM card.
3.
If the phone still fails to detect the SIM card, back up the data and restore the factory
settings. Then, insert the SIM card and check whether the phone can detect it.
4.
Check whether the SIM card can be identified by another phone and whether the phone
can detect another SIM card.
5.
Check whether the SIM card is standard (standard SIM cards are strongly recommended).
If not, back up the contacts in the SIM card and replace it with a standard SIM card at the
customer counter. Your phone may not detect a cut SIM card or a nano-SIM card
equipped with a card holder. These cards may damage the card tray.
6.
If the problem persists, the card tray may be damaged or other problems exist. You are
suggested to make a detection on your phone at the maintenance center.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
P8 Smartphone FAQs
9 SIM card and appearance
9.4 Why can't I insert the SIM card into my phone
smoothly?
1.
Make sure you use a standard micro-SIM card or nano-SIM card. Do not use a
non-standard card or a manually-cut card. If you cut the card or use the card with a card
holder, the size or edges may not be inappropriate, which affects the copper contacts or
even damages the card tray. Damages caused using non-standard cards are not covered
by warranty. You can replace your card with a standard card at the customer counter.
2.
If the card tray is inserted into the phone tightly without the SIM card, paint a little oil
(such as cooking oil) on the card tray and wipe it clean, or use a clean cloth to clean the
surface of the card tray, and then try inserting it into the phone.
3.
If you are using the standard card, gently scrap the wave pattern areas on both sides of
the card tray to remove foreign matters. Then, insert an empty card tray into your phone
to feel the plugging conditions.
9.5 Why are the outer surfaces of the SIM and microSD
card trays and the surfaces of the aluminum decorations
uneven?
The phone surface evenness at delivery is compliant with the quality control standards of the
industry. If the unevenness is obvious, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service
center and check whether there is a quality issue.
9.6 Why doesn't the SIM card slot have a spring?
The structure of the SIM card tray adopts the ultra-thin design, and the card holder is in a
leverage structure. You can use the delivery-attached eject tool in the gift box to take out the
card tray.
9.7 Why are the two gaps on the two sides of the SIM card
tray harsh?
Check whether the card tray is convex or concave. According to the design, to ensure that the
convex part is not harsh, there should be a 0.1 mm concave manufacturing tolerance. If the
problem is serious, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center and check
whether there is a quality issue.
9.8 How can I identify the SIM or microSD card insertion
direction?
The internal of the card tray indicates the upper and lower card tray positions. You can also
refer to the protective film instructions on the rear surface of the phone.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
P8 Smartphone FAQs
9 SIM card and appearance
9.9 Why do I feel the SIM card tray shaking?
The gap between the SIM card tray and the phone cover at delivery is compliant with the
quality control standards of the industry (the gap in the industry standard is 0.3 mm, and the
gap between the SIM card tray and the decorations is 0.2 mm according to Huawei phone
standard). Due to a certain error in assembly, zero gap can't be achieved. Take your phone to
an authorized Huawei service center and check whether there is a quality issue.
9.10 Why are there marks left on the cover after I
connected my phone to a USB cable for multiple times?
A reasonable design gap is reserved to prevent the charger from being disconnected from the
USB cable. Therefore, there are two hooks on the charger. During the plugging, the hooks rub
the cover. Most micro USB chargers in the industry adopt such a design except for Apple
chargers.
9.11 Why is the plastics around the touchscreen easy to get
smudgy?
The plastics around the touchscreen is a little higher than the touchscreen to protect the
touchscreen. Therefore, it is easy to get smudgy, which does not affect use.
9.12 Why is the gap between the battery cover and the
mechanical part large?
Try inserting two common A4 papers into the gap.
If the A4 papers can't be inserted, it indicates that the gap is smaller than 0.2 mm, because the
thickness of a standard A4 paper is 0.1 mm. Therefore, the gap complies with the Huawei
standard (0.2 mm). If the A4 papers can be inserted into the gap, take your phone to an
authorized Huawei service center and check whether there is a quality issue.
(The standard gap in the industry is smaller than or equal to 0.3 mm and the standard gap for
Huawei phones is smaller than or equal to 0.2 mm.)
9.13 Why is the front camera deviated?
This assembly error complies with the industry standard (the assembly error for Huawei
phones is smaller than 0.25 mm, and the assembly error in the industry is 0.3 mm). The visual
deviation does not affect the performance of the front camera.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
P8 Smartphone FAQs
9 SIM card and appearance
9.14 What can I do if the phone is bent and deformed?
The phone can bear a bending force less than 15 kg. If the bending force is larger than 15 kg,
the phone is deformed or damaged. If your phone is deformed, take your phone to an
authorized Huawei service center for maintenance.
9.15 Why is my phone's charging port seem black and
used?
Before delivery, your phone has been tested in multiple aspects, including charging and USB
cable connecting, so the charging port may seem black.
9.16 Why does the label on the battery cover show
"network access on trial"?
According to the Ministry of Industry and Information Technology regulations, all currently
certified 4G phones use the "network access on trial" labels.
9.17 Why do I feel the power button unstable?
A certain gap is designed to be reserved to provide a good button feel. The gap is 0.2 mm for
Huawei phones. Check whether your phone's functions and button feel are normal. If not, take
your phone to an authorized Huawei service center for inspection.
9.18 How can I turn on the screen if the power button does
not work?
Check whether the power button works properly after you remove the protection cover. If yes,
you may firmly press the button after the protection cover is used.
9.19 Why there are two black bars on the USB port of a
new phone?
Before delivery, your phone has been tested in multiple aspects, including charging and USB
cable connecting, so there may be two black bars inside the USB port.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
P8 Smartphone FAQs
9 SIM card and appearance
9.20 Why can't I take out the microSD card inserted in the
SIM card tray?
1.
Vertically insert Huawei delivery-attached eject tool into the hold on the card tray and
push harder to push the card tray out. Then, remove the card tray from the phone (for
details, see the User Guide or the guidance video on Youku).
2.
If the eject tool can't push the card tray out, try harder. If it still fails, take your phone to
an authorized Huawei service center for inspection.
3.
If the card tray can't be removed after it is pushed out, take your phone to an authorized
Huawei service center for inspection.
4.
If your eject tool is lost, use a paper clip instead of an item that is easy to be broken or
deformed, for example, toothpick.
9.21 Can I insert a nano-SIM card to my phone?
Yes.
9.22 Why are there knock marks on the frames of my
phone after it is used for a while?
The frames of your phone use Aluminum materials. Marks are left if the phones are knocked
on hard matters. Therefore, you are suggested to use a protection cover.
9.23 How do I take out the SIM card tray without the eject
tool?
1.
Use a paper clip or other metallic needle-like objects to push out the SIM card tray. Do
not use toothpicks or other breakable tools.
2.
You are suggested to purchase a standard eject tool at an authorized Huawei service
center to avoid internal component damages due to improper operations.
9.24 Why do I see a gap when I tilt my phone and look
into it through the flash lens?
The flash center and the optical center of the lens are coincided and there is no impact on the
performance. The dust silicone case in the gap can effectively prevent dust from entering the
phone.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
P8 Smartphone FAQs
9 SIM card and appearance
9.25 What can I do if the metal decorations become
deformed after my phone is dropped?
The metal decorations on both sides of the phone are made of Aluminum materials, which are
soft. If your phone is dropped or shocked, the metal decorations may be deformed. You are
suggested to use a protection cover.
9.26 Why do I have to push the SIM card tray really hard
for it to come out?
If your phone is new, to open the card tray, you need to insert the eject tool into the hole on
the tray and pull hard until the card tray comes out.
9.27 Why isn't the STK menu available when I touch the
SIM card signal?
Your SIM card is a 4G card that does not provide an STK menu.
9.28 What are the specifications for cards placed in the
upper and lower card trays?
The card specifications vary with phone models. For details, see the User Guide or Huawei
website.
GRA-UL00: upper card tray (card 2): microSD card or nano-SIM card (4FF); lower card tray
(card 1): Nano-SIM card (4FF)
GRA-L09: upper card tray (card 2): microSD card; lower card tray (card 1): Nano-SIM card
(4FF)
9.29 Why can't my phone detect the inserted SIM card
after my phone is powered on?
Your phone does not support hot swapping. You must restart your phone.
9.30 Why do I hear sound when I press the phone buttons?
The buttons of the phone are assembled with multiple components. The sound generated
when you press the buttons are due to the connector movement, which is a normal
phenomenon.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
P8 Smartphone FAQs
9 SIM card and appearance
9.31 Why do I feel the buttons loose or tight?
The buttons of the phone are assembled with multiple components. Therefore, you may feel
the buttons loose or tight when you press the buttons, which is a normal phenomenon.
9.32 What is the color scheme?
The color schemes vary with phones.
For example, your phone supports the following color scheme:
GRA-UL00&L09: silver and gray
9.33 Can I remove the battery cover and pre-installed
battery?
No. You can't to open the battery cover.
9.34 Why are there no indications on two card trays?
1.
The protective film on the rear surface of your phone indicates the card insertion
information.
2.
The card holder inside the card tray also indicates the card insertion information.
9.35 Does my phone support the micro-SIM card?
Your phone supports only standard Nano-SIM card instead of cut Nano-SIM card or
micro-SIM card.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
10
Messaging and email
10.1 Why doesn't the multimedia message send report take
effect?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Go to Messaging > Menu > Settings > Advanced. Enable Delivery reports.
2.
Press and hold the multimedia message and touch View report in the displayed menu.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
10.2 Why doesn't the multimedia message read report take
effect?
1.
This function requires the recipient to enable the function of sending read receipts. Go to
Messaging > Menu > Settings > Advanced. Enable Send read report.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
2.
Currently, this service is not provided by certain network service providers in China.
This function requires the support of both sender and receiver.
10.3 Why can't I log in to the company's email using the
Exchange?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Make sure the server address is correct. Contact your company's email server
administrator, check the server address, and manually set the server address.
2.
The Exchange server limits the maximum number of associated devices and historical
synchronization devices. If the device quantity exceeds these two limits, the login fails.
If you encounter this problem, contact your company's email server administrator to
check whether the device quantity exceeds the limits. If yes, request the administrator to
delete certain history bound devices.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
10.4 What can I do if I can't connect to the server when
refreshing my emails?
1.
Check the network connection status and set APN to CMNET.
2.
Wait for a while and then refresh the emails because the email server may be busy.
10.5 What can I do if I can't connect to the QQ mailbox
because I haven't activated the IMAP and POP3 services?
Open the browser on your computer or phone and log in to your QQ mailbox. Go to Settings >
Account and enable IMAP/SMTP and POP3/SMTP services, and use Email on your phone to
log in to your email.
10.6 Why can't I send or receive messages?
1.
Use another phone to check whether the problem is caused by the card.
2.
Make sure the number of the SMS center, which can be obtained from the service
provider, is correct.
3.
If security software is installed on your phone, uninstall the software or restore the
factory settings to check whether the problem is solved.
4.
Your phone reception may be poor. Take your phone to a place with good reception and
try again.
5.
You may be experiencing a network rush. Wait a while and try again.
6.
Make sure the recipient's phone number is correct.
10.7 What can I do if I can't send messages at a certain
time?
Call your service provider's service number and check whether your phone's messaging
function has been disabled.
10.8 Why is the image attached to the multimedia message
I sent to another phone unclear?
Attachments to a multimedia message can't exceed 300 KB. If an image is too large, it will be
automatically compressed before being attached to the message, as a result of which, the
image resolution will decrease. To send a large image, use WeChat or Email instead.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
10.9 Why doesn't my phone play any tone for received
SMSs?
1.
Check whether the ringtone volume is muted.
2.
Go to Messaging > Menu > Settings > General > Tone. Check whether you have set a
tone for messages.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
3.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Check whether you have enabled the do-not-disturb function.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
10.10 Why doesn't my phone display the SMSs according
to the time sequence and why are some SMSs fixed to the
top?
The information module supports the Pin function. You can set to display a certain
conversation on the top (press and hold the conversation and select the Pin option). There is a
green triangle mark in the upper right corner of the message displayed on the top. Other
normal messages are displayed according to the time sequence.
10.11 Why can't I log in to Gmail using Exchange?
Because the Gmail server is restricted, your phone can't acquire the exchange protocol
information and fails to log in to the Gmail account to synchronize the contacts and calendar
events. You can back up the Gmail account data on a computer and import the data to another
mailbox or Huawei cloud account.
10.12 How can I lock a specific message or delete messages
in batch?
Go to Messaging and touch a conversation to display all messages in the conversation. Touch
and hold the message you want to lock. From the displayed option menu, choose Lock.
To delete one or more conversations: In Messaging, touch and hold the conversation you
want to delete. Select more conversations to delete and touch Delete. To delete one or more
text messages from a conversation: In Messaging, touch a conversation to display all the text
messages in that conversation. Touch and hold the text message you want to delete, select
more text messages to delete, and touch Delete.
10.13 How many Chinese and English characters can be
contained in a text message?
A long message can contain up to 10 pages with a maximum of 670 Chinese characters or
1530 English characters.
10.14 How many text messages can be saved on my phone?
One conversation can save 500 text messages or multimedia messages.
On the messaging screen, touch the menu icon then Settings. Touch Delete old messages >
Text message limit to set a limit.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
10.15 What can I do if I can't send or receive multimedia
messages?
1.
The network condition or signal reception is poor. Try later.
2.
The network is busy to process the sent multimedia messages. Try later.
3.
The number of the recipient is incorrect. Correct the number and try again.
4.
The size of the multimedia message exceeds 300 KB. Delete certain content and try
again.
5.
Your phone does not have sufficient balance. Top up your phone and try again.
6.
The phone memory is insufficient. Delete some files from your phone to free up at least
300 KB memory.
10.16 Is there any restriction on the size, format, or
resolution of the file to be attached to a multimedia
message?
If an audio or video file exceeds the maximum size (generally 300 KB) allowed by your
service provider, it can't be attached to a multimedia message. If a picture is too large, it will
be automatically compressed before being attached to a message. As a result, the resolution of
the picture attached to the message decreases.
10.17 Where are the multimedia message attachments
saved?
By default, after you receive a multimedia message, the attachment is automatically saved to
the data folder, which is invisible to you.
You can save the attachment to the Download folder in the phone's internal storage or
microSD card.
10.18 How do I configure email settings?
Adding an email account
Log in to the email account. An email account can be configured automatically or manually.
To manually set an email account:
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
On the Account setup screen, enter your email account name and password.
2.
Touch Manual setup.
3.
Touch POP3 to configure the incoming server settings.
4.
Touch Next to configure the outgoing server settings.
5.
Touch Next and configure the email receiving settings, such as the inbox refresh
frequency.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
6.
Touch Next to name the account and enter your name.
7.
Touch Done to log in to your email and then access the inbox of the email account.
You can automatically set your email account for certain email service providers only when
the email settings have been preconfigured on your phone. To automatically set an email
account:
8.
On the Account setup screen, enter your email account name and password.
9.
Touch Next.
10. Touch Next and configure the email receiving settings, such as the inbox refresh
frequency.
11. Touch Next to name the account and enter your name.
12. Touch Done to log in to your email and then access the inbox of the email account.
For details about email account settings, contact your email service provider.
10.19 Can I view emails when no Internet connection is
available on my phone?
Yes, but only if the emails have been downloaded to your phone.
10.20 How do I synchronize contacts and calendar events?
To synchronize contacts, you must log in to at least one Exchange account.
On the Account setup screen, touch Exchange. Obtain the email server's settings from your
email service provider's website, configure the settings on your phone, and log in to your
Exchange account.
Go to Settings > Company. Select the account and options to be synchronized. Touch the
menu button. From the displayed option menu, choose Sync now.
If the contacts synchronization fails, check that your phone has Internet access and that the
email server supports contacts synchronization.
On the Add account screen,
Touch Exchange. Obtain the email server's settings from your email service provider's
website, configure the settings on your phone, and log in to your Exchange account.
Go to Settings > Accounts, and touch your account and select the data you want to
synchronize. Touch the menu button. From the displayed option menu, choose Sync now to
synchronize the selected data to your phone.
10.21 Why can't I change the ringtone and vibration
settings of my email?
Your phone may have been set to silent mode. Set your phone back to ring mode.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
10.22 How can I set a different ringtone for the messages?
Go to Messaging > Menu > General > Tone. Then, set the ringtone for messages.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
10.23 How do I preview new messages on the notification
panel?
In the option menu of messaging, touch Settings and enable Message preview.
10.24 Can I restore deleted messages?
No.
10.25 Is there any restriction on the email attachment size?
The total size of attachments in a single email must not exceed 5 MB. For a large attachment,
you can split it and send each part separately.
10.26 Why doesn't my phone play any tone?
Go to Settings > Sound > Volume. Drag the slider under Ringtone & notifications to adjust
the volume.
10.27 How can I add a message signature?
On the messaging screen, touch the menu icon then Settings, and enable Attach signature.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
10.28 How do I hide the sender information when
forwarding a message?
On the messaging screen, touch the menu icon then Settings, and disable Show sender when
forwarding.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
10.29 How do I send contact information using the
multimedia message?
Touch and hold the contact that you want to send in the contact list, select Share contacts >
Messaging, select MMS vCard and then send the multimedia message by following the
onscreen instructions.
10.30 How can I block harassment messages?
Go to Messaging > Harassment filter. Add the specific contact to the blacklist and touch
OK.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
10.31 How do I remove an email account?
Go to Settings > Accounts > Email. Select the email account to be deleted and touch
Remove account.
10.32 How can I view the contacts on the blacklist?
Go to Messaging > Harassment filter. Touch the information to view.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
10.33 How do I clear unread notifications?
On the Notifications panel, touch the Notifications tab page, and touch the trash icon.
10.34 Can I change the Message ringtone?
On the messaging screen, touch the menu icon. Touch Tone and then select a tone.
When you change Default notification tone in the system settings, the message ringtone is
not changed accordingly.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
P8 Smartphone FAQs
10 Messaging and email
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
When you change Default notification tone in the system settings, the message ringtone is not changed
accordingly.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11
Network access and data sharing
11.1 Why is there no signal displayed in the signal bar?
1.
Make sure the SIM card is inserted properly.
2.
Make sure your account has sufficient balance.
3.
If the problem persists, call your service provider's service number.
11.2 Why is the network unavailable when I browse a web
page or download data?
1.
Make sure you network carrier has enabled the data services for your phone.
2.
Make sure you have turned on the data services on your phone.
3.
If the problem persists, use you SIM card on another phone that has normal network
connection and check whether the SIM card is faulty.
11.3 Why does my Phone use only the GSM services while
it is roaming?
Besides the GSM services, your Phone also supports the TDD-LTE, FDD-LTE, and WCDMA
services.
11.4 Why does the signal strength become poor when I
place my phone on metallic objects or use a cover made of
metal?
The RF antenna is installed in the bottom of your phone. When you place your phone on
metallic objects, the antenna is close to the metal,
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.5 Does my phone support the GSM 850 MHz network
while it is roaming in other countries?
Yes.
11.6 Why can't my phone access the Internet or use data
services?
I. Insert the card and power on your phone.
1.
Make sure the SIM card is normal. The new card or cut card may encounter the network
access problems. Use the SIM card on another phone. If the other phone also fails to
access the Internet, replace your card at the customer counter.
2.
Make sure you have sufficient balance in your account and there is sufficient data traffic
quota of your data plan.
3.
For a dual-card phone, make sure the data traffic is activated for the current card (if the
data traffic is successfully activated, Up and Down arrows are displayed near the signal
bar. You can set the data traffic in Settings > Manage SIM card.
4.
Disable the mobile data function and then enable it again.
II. Identify other causes.
5.
Make sure Mobile data is enabled. Click down from the status bar to enable mobile
data.
6.
If the 4G service is not enabled for your phone, disable the 4G function to avoid signal
interference.
7.
Go to Settings > Mobile networks > Access Point Names > Edit APN protocol.
Change IPv4/IPv6 to IPv4, and then restart your phone.
8.
In certain areas (in Shenzhen), if the data quota of the 4G data package is used up, your
phone fails to register with the 4G network. You can temporarily disable the 4G
function.
9.
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > More > Mobile networks > Access Point Names.
Reset the access point.
11.7 Why does my phone have no signal after I take it out
from my pocket and become normal after I restart it?
The phones using cut cards may encounter this problem. You are suggested to use a standard
SIM card.
11.8 Why is the signal unstable?
1.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Make sure your SIM card is a 4G card, the 4G service is enabled, and 4G data plan is
valid.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2.
11 Network access and data sharing
The 4G signals may be unstable due to the limited network coverage, which is a normal
phenomenon and does not affect your calls. Check whether the signals become normal
after you disable the 4G service. You can enable the 4G service when it is required.
11.9 Why is there no signal suddenly?
1.
Make sure your SIM card is standard (cut cards are not supported), because non-standard
cards may cause this problem.
2.
Make sure you are in an open area instead of a closed area or a remote area with poor
signal strength.
11.10 How do I share a network and enable a Wi-Fi
hotspot?
When you enable the Wi-Fi hotspot on your phone, other phones can access the Internet using
your data plan.
Go to Settings > More > Tethering & portable hotspot > Portable Wi-Fi hotspot to set the
hotspot.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
To set the hotspot name and encryption mode, go to Set up Wi-Fi hotspot.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.11 How do I set a static IP address for my phone to
connect to a Wi-Fi network?
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi. On the Wi-Fi screen, touch a hotspot. In the
displayed dialog box, select Show advanced options. In the IP settings, select Static. Enter
the IP address (mostly 192.168.1.xxx), gateway address (mostly 192.168.1.1), subnet mask or
network mask (255.255.255.0), and domain name (DNS address).
You have to wait for Wi-Fi network connection, because after your phone is connected to a
router, it obtains a dynamic IP address, which consumes time. By specifying a static IP
address for your phone, this issue is solved.
11.12 How do I set the modem function of my phone to
connect to the computer?
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > More > Tethering & portable hotspot and enable
USB tethering.
On a computer, use HiSuite to install the USB driver for your phone. Right-click My
Computer and choose Manage. The screen displays the new network adapter.
When using USB tethering, your phone's mobile data connection must be turned on. Otherwise, your
phone can't provide Internet access for computers.
If the computer provides a wireless network adapter, you can turn on Portable Wi-Fi hotspot
under Settings > Wireless & Networks > More > Tethering & portable hotspot on your
phone. Then the computer can connect to your phone over Wi-Fi to access the Internet.
Currently, this function is available to computers running Windows.
11.13 What are the differences between FDD and TDD?
TDD-LTE means Time-division Long Term Evolution, and FDD-LTE means Frequency-Division
Long-Term Evolution. To be simple, TDD-LTE distributes the network resources to different
users at different times, while FDD-LTE distributes the network resources to different users
with different frequencies. TDD-LTE and FDD-LTE both belong to LTE, which is the name
given by the 3GPP for the next generation of telecommunication standards.
11.14 Does my phone support SIM card hot swapping?
No.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.15 Why can't I delete the data usage record for the
current date?
You can't delete the data usage record from the running notifications. You can delete the data
usage record in Phone Manager in the following path:
Phone Manager > Usage > Data plan settings > Display traffic information in
notifications
11.16 Why is my daily data usage refreshed to my monthly
data limit every day after my data usage exceeds the
monthly limit?
Your phone only displays your data plan usage status. After you have used up all the data
volume covered in your data plan, the daily data usage will be refreshed to your monthly data
plan limit.
11.17 How can I save my data usage?
1.
When the Wi-Fi
Fi network is available, use the Wi-Fi
Wi network.
2.
Turn off your data service when you don't need to go on the Internet.
3.
When you surf the Internet, set your phone to block images on web pages.
4.
On the browser screen, open the option menu, and touch No images/Off
images/Off. Wait until the
icon is changed to No images/On.
5.
If not needed, turn off background data synchronization.
Open the notification panel and touch
6.
.
Close networked applications not in use.
Open the list of recently used applications. Flick left or right across an application or
touch
to close it, or touch
to close all applications simultaneously.
11.18 How do I set my phone not to automatically recover
the mobile network connection when the Wi-Fi
connection is interrupted?
When the Wi-Fi
Fi and mobile data connections are both enabled, your phone prefers the Wi-Fi
Wi
connection. If the Wi-Fi
Wi Fi connection is interrupted, your phone prompts you whether to
recover the mobile data connection.
For some phone models, you can set to not recover the mobile data connection by default. You
can go to Settings > More > Mobile networks > Mobile data switch reminder and select
Do not resume mobile data.
data
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
5
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.19 Why can't I connect my phone using an OTG cable?
1.
When you connect an OTG cable to your phone, the phone functions as a card reader.
Check whether your phone supports a microSD card and the USB drive function. If not,
use another phone.
2.
Check whether the microSD card was inserted into the phone correctly.
3.
If a microSD card has already been inserted, check whether USB drive mode is activated
on the connected phone.
4.
When an OTG cable is used to connect your phone to a USB storage device, the phone
provides power to the device. Certain USB storage devices that have a high power rating
such as portable hard drives or phones may not function properly.
11.20 Why can't I connect my phone to a USB drive using
the OTG cable?
The USB drive may be incompatible. Try again with another USB drive.
11.21 Can I connect my phone to a mouse or a keyboard
using the OTG cable?
Yes, if your phone supports OTG. When connected, the phone provides power to the mouse or
keyboard. Certain devices with a high power rating may not work properly. In this case, use
another mouse or keyboard.
11.22 Why does my phone fail to transfer files after the
Bluetooth connection is successful?
1.
The distance between your phone and the other Bluetooth device is over 10 meters.
2.
The other Bluetooth device did not respond to your file transfer request in time.
3.
The other Bluetooth device does not support the format of the file you are trying to send.
11.23 How do I view my phone's MAC address?
When the phone is connecting to a Wi-Fi network that uses MAC filtering to ensure secure
access, you need to find the phone's MAC address and add it to the wireless network's access
list.
Go to Settings and select About phone > Status to view the phone's MAC address.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access
acce and data sharing
11.24 How can I tell whether the phone is connecting to
the Internet using mobile data or Wi-Fi
Wi Fi network?
Check the status bar on
on the top of the screen to determine the connection status.
If you see
, the phone is connected to the Internet using the Wi-Fi
Wi Fi network. If you see
, the phone is connected to the Internet using a mobile data connection.
11.25 How do I view mobile data usage?
Go to Settings and select More > Data traffic management to view the phone's mobile data
usage statistics.
11.26 Can I share my phone's mobile network connection
using a USB cable?
If your phone supports USB tethering, you can share your phone's mobile Internet connection
with your computer using a USB cable.
Due to differences between various computer operating systems, you may need to install a
phone driver on your computer or configure an appropriate network connection before using
this feature. Refer to your computer's operating system instructions for details.
Connect your phone to the computer using a USB cable, go to Settings,, select More >
Tethering & portable hotspot > USB tethering and activate the USB tethering function.
Accessing the Internet on your computer consumes more mobile data than using your phone.
Only use this function if you have a suitably large mobile data package.
Accessing the Internet on your computer consumes more mobile data than using your phone. Only use this
function if you have
hav a suitably large mobile data package.
11.27 How can I tell whether my phone supports Bluetooth
tethering?
Go to Settings and select More > Tethering & portable hotspot.. Your phone supports
tethering if the Bluetooth tethering option is available.
11.28 What is a Wi-Fi
Fi hotspot?
When the Wi-Fi
Fi hotspot function is enabled, other devices can connect to your phone using
the Wi-Fi hotspot and access the Internet free of charge using your data plan. It is best not to
enable this feature if you only have a limited data plan.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
7
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.29 How do I add a bookmark in the built-in
built in web
browser?
Open the Menu from the Browser screen and touch Bookmarks and web history.
history From the
browsing history, touch and hold the page to be bookmarked and select Save to bookmarks
from the pop-up
up menu.
11.30 How do I close pages in the built-in
built in browser?
On the Browser screen, select
Touch
or
to display thumbnails of all the pages that are open.
to close the pages that are not needed.
11.31 How do I open a new page in the built-in
built in browser?
Enter the URL directly in the
t address bar on the Browser screen.
11.32 How do I delete personal data from the built
built-in
browser?
On the Browser screen, open the options menu and select Settings > Privacy & security.
security
Select the data you need to delete, such as the cache, browsing history, cookies,
cookies, and forms
data. Delete data by following the onscreen instructions.
11.33 How do I save an image from a web page?
On a web page, touch and hold the image you want to save and select Save image from the
pop-up menu.
11.34 How do I transfer files using OTG?
Use an OTG cable to connect your phone to a USB storage device. Open the Local tab in
Files and select USB. You can now transfer files between your phone and the USB storage
device.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
8
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.35 Why is the network speed slow when I use the Wi-Fi
connection?
Replace a wireless router or use another network. Try updating your phone's software to the
latest version, and then re-connecting to the network.
11.36 When I send files using Bluetooth, why does the
Wi-Fi connection sometimes become unavailable?
The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions use the same antenna. When the Bluetooth occupancy is
very high, the Wi-Fi performance is degraded or the Wi-Fi connection may be disconnected.
Try again after turning off the Bluetooth.
11.37 Why can't I access the Internet in the ultra power
saving mode?
To save power, your phone can't access the data network or the Wi-Fi network in the ultra
power saving mode.
11.38 How do I disable the 4G network connection?
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > More > Mobile network. Touch Preferred
network type, and select 3G/2G auto.
11.39 Why does my phone have no 4G signal?
1.
Flick down the status bar to display the notifications panel. On the switch tab page,
check whether the 4G network switch is enabled.
2.
For a dual-card phone, check whether the SIM card is inserted in the 4G card tray.
3.
Check whether the SIM card is a 4G card and whether the 4G data plan is activated.
4.
Provide the information about addresses where no 4G signal is received to the service
provider and learn the local 4G network coverage conditions.
11.40 Does the 4G network consume much traffic?
The data transmission speed of the 4G network is much higher than that of the 3G network.
The traffic consumption depends on the user data usage instead of the networks.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.41 Why can't I access the 4G network?
Ensure that the following conditions are satisfied:
1.
Your phone supports the 4G network.
2.
The SIM card is a 4G card.
3.
You have activated the 4G data plan and the enabled the 4G network connection on your
phone.
4.
The service provider provides local 4G network coverage.
11.42 Can my 4G phone use the 3G card?
Yes, your phone can use the 3G card provided by the same service provider.
11.43 What is 4G?
4G is short for the 4th Generation Mobile Communication, which supports faster data
transmission than the 3G network.
11.44 Why does the 4G phone consume more traffic than
the 3G phone?
This understanding is incorrect.
The 4G network uses 42 MHz frequency and the 3G network uses 21 MHz frequency. The
download speed of the 4G network is faster than that of the 3G network. However, fast speed
does not mean a large traffic consumption. Traffic consumption depends on the user data
usage instead of networks and phones.
The data transmission speed of the 4G network is faster. Misoperations may consume a large
amount of traffic. Therefore, you are suggested to disable the mobile data services when you
are not using the mobile network.
11.45 How can I use the 4G service?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
You need to sign the contract for using the 4G service.
2.
You need to obtain a 4G SIM card.
3.
You need to have a phone supporting the 4G network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
P8 Smartphone FAQs
11 Network access and data sharing
11.46 Why is the usage calibration message of Phone
Manager incorrect or is the calibration failed?
This function is subject to the service providers. In certain areas, the automatic usage
calibration function is not valid. You need to manually send a message to the service provider
to query the usage. Then, in Traffic manager of Phone Manager, enter the queried usage
and set the Data limit/Start day.
11.47 Why can I use only the 2G network?
Make sure you have correctly placed the SIM card in the 4G card tray, the 4G service has
been activated for your 4G phone, and the current area is covered by the 4G network.
11.48 What is Signal+?
The Signal+ provides the following functions:
1.
When the signals in the edge areas of the network are weak, the Signal+ receives signals
in an all-round manner, thereby optimizing the network experience and call quality.
2.
In a high-speed mobile network environment (for example, on a train), the Signal+
improves the call success rate and reduces the network drop or call drop rate.
11.49 Where can I learn the Signal+ description?
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > More > Link+-Signal+ to learn the specific
description.
11.50 What is Roaming+?
When you power on your phone for the first time or disable airplane mode in other countries,
the Roaming+ function can search for an available roaming network within the shortest period
of time.
11.51 Where can I learn the Roaming+ description?
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > More > Link+-Roaming+ to learn the specific description.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
12
Screen and display
12.1 What can I do if my screen is erratic?
1.
Check whether this problem occurs only when you use a certain app or certain apps. If
yes, this problem is not caused by your phone. There are various apps in the app market.
Certain apps occupy more phone resources and therefore cause certain problems. Certain
apps may contain viruses that consume more service charges or traffic. You are
suggested to download apps from Huawei App Center.
2.
If the problem persists after you uninstall the related apps, back up the data in your
phone and restore the factory settings.
3.
If the screen does not automatically turn on after you end a call, press the power button
to turn on the screen. Check whether the light sensor on the upper part of the screen is
blocked. When you place the phone near your face, the sensor detects the blocking and
the phone turns off the screen, to avoid call release by misoperations. If the sensor is
blocked, your phone does not automatically turn on the screen after you end the call.
4.
Check whether the Strict Mode enabled option in Developer options is enabled. This
option causes a red rectangle to border the screen. Therefore, disable the Developer
options when you normally use the phone.
5.
Check whether you have received the system update notification in System updates.
Connect to the Wi-Fi network and download the latest system version. Then, update your
system.
12.2 Why can I see some horizontal lines under lights
when the screen is turned off?
This is a normal phenomenon, which is caused by the circuit transparency of the touchscreen
functions.
12.3 Why doesn't the touchscreen respond when I slide the
screen to unlock?
This problem may be caused when you receive an incoming call with your phone in your
pocket. If this problem is caused by misoperations on the touchscreen, press the power button
to lock the screen. Then, the screen resumes after it turns on. If this problem occurs during
charging, check whether you use a standard charger.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
12.4 Why does my phone automatically open apps or
display screens when I am using the phone while it is
charging?
You may be using a non-standard charger, which may result in your touchscreen's
malfunctions. Use the standard charger to charge your phone.
12.5 Why is the automatic LCD brightness adjustment
discontinuous?
The backlight brightness adjustment mechanism of Huawei phones uses the universal
algorithm in the industry. This design mode is widely used. Therefore, this problem is a
common phenomenon instead of a phone defect.
12.6 Why does my screen have scratches?
1.
Check whether the scratches exist when the delivery-attached protective film is pasted on
the screen. If yes, tear off the protective film and check whether the scratches disappear.
The protective film is only for packaging protection. You are suggested to use a
dedicated screen protective film.
2.
If you have replaced the protective film, tear off the screen protective film and check
whether the screen is faulty. If the scratches disappear, you are suggested to replace a
screen protective film.
12.7 Why is the screen darker or brighter?
Check whether the light sensor works properly. If the light sensor is blocked, the screen
brightness may be abnormal.
By default, your phone automatically adjusts its screen brightness based on the ambient
environmental brightness to bring you the optimal visual experience. If this function is not
desirable, turn it off and manually adjust the screen brightness.
You can adjust the brightness in Settings > Display > Brightness.
If the screen color is too cool or warm, go to Settings > Display > Color temperature.
Deselect Default, and drag the slider to adjust the color temperature.
Check whether the phone is in ultra power saving mode. In this mode, the screen becomes
darker, and you can only use the phone, message, and contact functions. You can touch the
exit button to exit ultra power saving mode.
If the screen has experienced external shocks, the internal LCD may be damaged, which
causes abnormal screen brightness or color. Contact Huawei technical support or take your
phone to an authorized Huawei service center.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
12.8 Why do ripples appear on my screen when I press it
hard?
The LCD is a precision component. The force applied to the LCD in normal use will not
cause ripples. Only when under great force will ripples appear. This is a common
phenomenon, and the screen will return to normal after the external force is removed.
12.9 Why isn't the screen of my phone as bright-colored
and beautiful as that of a Samsung phone?
Your phone uses the IPS screen, which is the same as that of iPhone 6. The color of IPS
screen is fine, smooth, and accurate. Samsung phones use the AMOLED screens.
12.10 What can I do if my screen is exposed to water?
If water has entered your phone, you can't simply return your phone. The non-warranty
maintenance is recommended.
If no water has entered your phone, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center.
12.11 Why does my screen look a little yellow?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Go to Settings > Display > Color temperature.
2.
Deselect Default.
3.
If you feel the screen is a little yellow, drag the color temperature bar towards Cold until
you feel it is proper; if you feel the screen is a little blue, drag the color temperature bar
towards Warm until you feel it is proper.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
12.12 Why does my phone have a light leakage problem
when the screen is turned off?
If the screen is whitish when it is turned off, it is normal. Huawei phones (Honor 6 Plus/P8)
use the cutting-edge
edge JDI screens which pass strict quality tests before delivery. This
phenomenon is normal and does not affect
a
the phone functions.
12.13 Why does the screen have bright spots, dark spots,
impurity spots, or black spots?
Huawei phones adopt the universal standards in the industry. Around 5 mm outside the dark
spots and impurity spots, the dark spots and impurity spots
spots with the diameter between 0.1 mm
and 0.2 mm are allowed. The impurity spots with the diameter smaller than 0.1 mm are
negligible. This phenomenon is normal and does not affect the phone functions.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
15
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
12.14 Why are there black margins on the upper and lower
edges of the screen or the edges darker?
On the theme screen, there are 2–3 mm black margins on the upper and lower edges of the
screen, or the edges are darker. This is a UI coverage effect instead of device fault and does
not affect the phone functions.
12.15 Why is the screen of my phone a little red, unclear,
or blurry?
Huawei phones (Honor 6 Plus or P8) use a special type of screens that have better contrast
and color gamut effects.
1.
Huawei phones use the Negative LCD screens. Compared with the general LCD screens,
the Negative LCD screens feature darker dark state, brighter maximum brightness, and
brighter bright state. The contrast of the Negative LCD screens reaches 1500:1, which is
15% higher than that of the iPhone 6 Plus (1300:1). Therefore, the screens of Huawei
phones do not have the unclear and blurry problems.
2.
The color gamut of the screens of Huawei phones is high. The color saturation is 85%,
which is 15% higher than that of iPhone 6 Plus (60%). Therefore, the color is more vivid.
This is a brand-new technology and can't be simply compared with common screens.
This phenomenon is normal and does not affect the phone functions.
12.16 Why does my screen automatically change or why
does my phone automatically open software?
1.
If the screen automatically changes when your phone is charging or connecting to the
computer using a data cable, the voltage may be unstable, or the data cable or charger is
not original. Over-high voltage causes interference on the touchscreen. The touchscreen
may incorrectly detect touching actions. Therefore, use original charger or data cable
provided by Huawei.
2.
Connect your phone to a Wi-Fi network. Go to Settings > Updater > Check for
updates. Check whether any system update notification exists. If yes, update your phone
to the latest version.
12.17 Why doesn't the touchscreen respond sometimes?
Check whether you open too many apps or open certain apps (for example, games) that
consume a large amount of memory resources. Close the apps and try again.
12.18 Why does the screen turn off during a call?
This is normal. When your ear or other object triggers the proximity sensor, the screen
automatically turns off to prevent misoperations. The screen turns back on when the object
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
blocking the proximity sensor is moved away. The screen turns back on when the object
blocking the proximity sensor is moved away.
Do not block the area around the receiver with the phone cover or other objects. When
attaching a screen protective film, ensure that it does not come into contact with the proximity
sensor. Covers
ers that are not very transparent will impair the functioning of the proximity
sensor.
12.19 Why doesn't the screen automatically rotate?
1.
Check whether you have enabled the automatic screen rotation function.
Open the notification panel and touch
to turn on the auto-rotate
rotate screen function.
2.
If this happens when you are using a third-party
third party app, check whether the app is based on
the gravity sensor.
3.
Your phone's tilt sensor may fail to work if certain system files are deleted. Back up
important data and
and restore your phone to its factory settings or update your phone.
Go to the Huawei Downloads Page and download the software update package. Refer to
the update guide in the package before completing the update.
12.20 Why can't the virtual buttons on the navigation
navigation bar
be hidden?
Go to Settings > Navigation bar,
bar and touch
to hide the navigation bar.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
12.21 If I forget the screen unlock pattern or password,
what can I do?
When you set the screen unlock pattern, set a backup numeric password according to the
onscreen instructions. When you forget the screen unlock pattern, you can use the backup
numeric password to unlock the screen.
If you forget the backup unlock password, you can update your phone.
Updating your phone erases all user data from your phone.
Select the updating mode according to your phone model.
1.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Updating using a microSD card:
−
Go to the Huawei Downloads Page and download the software update package.
−
Copy the dload folder in the software package to a microSD card's root directory.
−
Power off the phone and insert the microSD card into your phone.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
17
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
−
Then, press and hold the power, volume up, and volume down keys simultaneously
until the Android robot icon appears.
Yourr phone will be updated and restored to its factory settings.
2.
Updating using a storage device:
−
Go to the Huawei Downloads Page and download the software update package.
−
Copy the dload folder in the software package to a USB flash drive's root directory.
−
Power off your phone, and use a USB OTG cable to connect your phone to the USB
flash drive.
−
Then, simultaneously press and hold the power, volume up, and volume down buttons
to enter updating mode.
To purchase a USB OTG cable, contact your device vendor.
vendo
Your phone will be updated and restored to its factory settings.
If your phone can't be updated, contact Huawei technical support or take your phone to an
authorized Huawei service center.
12.22 Why is the touchscreen slow or unresponsive during
normal use?
1.
Check whether there is a screen protective film attached. Some screen protective films
affect the touchscreen function when they are badly scratched.
2.
Opening a large app or lots of background apps may temporarily cause the phone to
freeze, making the touchscreen
touc
unresponsive.
Wait patiently or clean up background apps and then check whether the touchscreen has
returned to normal.
Close the background apps that you do not need: go to Settings,, touch Manage apps and
select the apps that you wish to close. Then
Th touch Force stop and close the app
according to the onscreen instructions.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
18
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
If your phone features Phone Manager,, you can use it to close apps: open Phone
Manager,, touch Phone accelerator and close all background apps at the touch of a
button.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
If the problem persists, contact Huawei technical support or take your phone to an
authorized Huawei service center.
cent
12.23 How do I cancel the screen unlock password?
For EMUI 3.1:
Go to Settings > All > Privacy & security > Screen lock & passwords > Password
Password. Cancel
the password for unlocking.
12.24 How do I delete unnecessary home screens?
Pinch two fingers together to switch to the home screen management panel and then touch
on the empty home screen to delete it.
12.25 How do I set a live wallpaper?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Touch and hold an empty area on the home screen to display Set Home Screen
Screen.
2.
Touch Wallpapers > Home screen wallpaper.
wallpaper
3.
Select a wallpaper
aper under Live wallpapers.
4.
Touch Set wallpaper.
wallpaper
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
19
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
12.26 How do I capture a screenshot?
Press the power and volume down buttons simultaneously to take a screenshot. Screenshots
are saved by default in the Screenshots folder in Gallery.
For the EMUI 3.1 and later platforms,
platforms, you can use the smart screenshot function.
12.27 How do I set the screen switching effect?
Touch and hold an empty area on the home screen. Touch Transitions and set the desired
effect.
12.28 How do I add a widget to the home screen?
Touch and hold an empty
empt area on the home screen. Touch Widget and drag a widget to the
home screen.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
12.29 How do I exit the simple home screen?
Flick left and right on the screen. Touch Standard home to exit the simple home screen.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
20
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
12.30 How do I display the navigation bar?
You can display the navigation bar by flicking up the screen from the bottom on any screen.
12.31 How do I use the screen lock widget?
If your phone supports this function, touch the screen lock widget icon to lock the screen.
12.32 Why doesn't my phone screen turn off after I cover
my palm on it?
To lock the screen: When the screen is turned on, cover your palm on the screen and press
against the screen gently until the phone vibrates.
12.33 How do I quickly wake up the screen?
On Motions and gestures, touch Double touch and select Double touch to turn on the
screen. Then, you can quickly wake up the screen when the phone is in sleep mode.
12.34 Can I operate my phone using wet hands?
If you use your phone with wet hands, the phone may get wet and faulty. The touchscreen
may also fail to respond to the operations. To ensure normal functioning of the phone, wipe
your hands before you use your phone.
12.35 How do I switch back to the home screen in preview
mode?
Pinch two or three fingers together to switch the current screen to the home screen in preview
mode.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
P8 Smartphone FAQs
12 Screen and display
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
12.36 When does my phone display the interactive
screensaver?
If this function is enabled, your phone plays the selected screensaver images when it enters
sleep mode during charging.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
22
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13
System settings
13.1 How do I quickly enable Huawei Music?
1.
On the lock screen, consecutively touch the screen twice and the Music buttons is
displayed.
2.
If you use a leather case, switch over the windows to enter the music screen.
3.
If you use a headset, press the Play/Pause button to enable the music.
13.2 What can I do if I can't find English words in my
words in Huawei Swype?
Check whether the default language of Huawei Swype is English, because English letters can
be displayed only when the input language is set to English.
13.3 Why aren't there shortcut number buttons on the
keyboard of Huawei Swype?
The keyboard of Huawei Swype does not have independent number buttons. However, you
can use one of the following methods to input numbers:
1.
Touch the ?123 button to display digits and special characters.
2.
Touch and hold the ?123 button to display the numeric keypad.
3.
Touch Numeric keypad. Then, you can directly enter digits using the numeric keypad.
13.4 Does the Text-to-Voice function support Chinese?
This function is provided by the GMS app, which is provided and maintained by Google. This
function is for the APK delivery. Therefore, it does not support Chinese. This function
requires the voice data package. Currently, Google does not provide Chinese voice data
package.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.5 How do I change the system language?
Huawei phones support 47 languages such as Chinese Simplified, Chinese Traditional,
English, Japanese, and Korean.
To change the system language: On the home screen, go to Settings > System > Language &
input > System language&region > Language&region, and select a language.
13.6 How do I change the system font size?
Go to Settings, touch Display > Font size, and then select a font size.
13.7 What can I do if my phone can't automatically adjust
its screen brightness?
Check whether the auto-brightness function is enabled. If not, select this function.
13.8 What can I do if my phone can't automatically rotate
its screen?
Check whether Auto-rotate is enabled. If not, select this function.
13.9 Why does the font size remain unchanged after I set it
to large?
You can only set the font sizes in the menu, contacts, and messages. The font sizes in icons
and web pages can't be changed.
13.10 Where can I draw the unlock pattern after I turn on
the screen?
Flick the screen and draw the unlock pattern.
To do so:
For EMUI 3.1, go to Settings > All > Privacy & security > Screen lock & passwords.
Touch Password.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.11 Why can't I unlock my screen when I flick upwards
or downwards on the lock screen?
You can only flick left or right to unlock your screen if magazine unlock is enabled. If you
flick upwards, there are four shortcut buttons.
13.12 How do I hide the virtual buttons?
Go to Settings > All > Navigation bar.
bar Touch Navigation bar.
The figuress are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.13 How do I exit Developer options?
On the home screen, go to Settings > Manage apps > All > Settings >Clear
Clear cache
cache.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
25
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.14 How do I hide apps, such as WeChat, in visitor
mode?
Go to Settings > Security > Privacy protection > Set passwords.. Then, select the apps to be
hidden in visitor mode, for example, WeChat or Weibo.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
26
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
27
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.15 What can I do if my phone automatically sends
messages in the background to query the data usage?
Go to Settings > Data Traffic management > Package settings > Automatic calibration
calibration. If
Automatic calibration is enabled, your phone sends a message every day to query the data
usage. If you do not want such a function, set it to off.
13.16 Why is there a blinking red frame on the screen?
You may have enabled the developer options that are hidden in the system and selected strict
mode under Settings
ettings > Developer options > Strict mode enabled.. If strict mode is enabled,
the screen blinks when the app is operated for a long period of time using the main thread.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.17 Can I clear the data usage record?
No.
13.18 How do I set the remaining battery level to be
displayed in percentage?
Go to Settings > Battery > and touch Remaining battery percentage.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
28
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.19 How do I set the text to speech function?
1.
When you enable the text to speech function, the phone reads the contact name (if the
number is not saved in the phone, the calling party is called an unknown number) when a
call is coming. If you speak "Answer", the phone answers the call.
2.
When you enable the text to speech function, the phone reads the contact name (if the
number is not saved in the phone, the calling party is called a stranger) when a message
is received. If you speak "Read", the phone reads the message.
message
You can set the text to speech function under HiVoice > Settings > Text to speech
speech.
13.20 Why can't I lock my screen during phone calls and
isn't there any screen locking sound?
During the phone calls, unlocking the screen is determined by the preconfigured uunlock
pattern.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
If the unlock pattern is set to None,, when you press the power button during phone calls,
only the screen turns on or off instead of unlocking.
2.
If the unlock pattern is set to Pattern, PIN, or Password,, when you press the power
button during
ng phone calls, the screen is locked and turns on or off, but no screen locking
sound is generated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
29
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.21 Why are the folder icons disordered?
When you power on/off the phone, the microSD card is uninstalled and the apps installed in
the microSD card also experience the uninstallation action. The icons of the apps in the folder
are closely arranged in sequence, and the positions of the icons before uninstallation can't be
recorded. As a result, when the microSD card is uninstalled, subsequent icons automatically
fill in the positions of those icons of apps in the microSD card. When the microSD card is
installed again, the icons of the apps are displayed following the existing icons. You are
suggested to install the apps in your phone.
Go to Settings > Manage apps. Select the corresponding app and move it to the phone
memory.
13.22 Why are the icons disordered after I unlock the
screen, and why are the icons automatically recovered
after I re-arrange them?
Check whether you arrange the icons in visitor mode. To maintain a normal home screen, the
icon arrangement is not recorded in visitor mode, and the home screen recovers when you
unlock the screen again. You can unlock the screen use the owner password and set the home
screen in owner mode.
13.23 Why are the icons moved to the upper part of the
home screen when I uninstall certain icons on the home
screen?
After an icon is uninstalled, another icon automatically fills in its position. All icons are
arranged in sequence from the top of the home screen. In the later OTA version, a switch will
be provided to control this function.
13.24 Why is the magazine unlock update stopped at a
certain percentage?
The magazine unlock update server may be busy. Try updating in another time.
13.25 Why are some widgets lost when I arrange the home
screen?
According to the widget design for the EMUI platform, after the mesh is changed, the icons
are re-arranged. The excessive apps are placed in a folder, and excessive widgets are deleted.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.26 Why are certain icons disappeared or overlapped?
Check whether the disappeared apps are installed in the microSD card. If yes, your phone may
improperly read data from the microSD card, and the apps are disappeared. You are suggested
to install the apps in your phone. Go to Settings > Manage apps. Select the corresponding
app and move it to the phone.
13.27 Why can't I find the camera app icon on the home
screen?
The app may be disabled for facilitating the APK management in the Android system. As a
result, you can't find the app icon. To solve this issue:
Go to Settings > Manage apps. Check whether Camera is Disable. If yes, enable it
manually.
13.28 Why is the screen brightness a little darker when I
browse a web page?
You can drag the brightness bar to a proper position.
13.29 Why does the screen brightness become brighter in
normal power-saving mode?
Only the CPU and network connection frequencies are slightly adjusted if you enable normal
power-saving mode.
13.30 How do I connect my phone to the HiSuite?
1.
Install the HiSuite on the computer (only the Windows OS is supported).
2.
Connect your phone to the computer using a USB cable.
3.
In the USB connection mode screen, touch PC assistant (HiSuite).
4.
Enable the HiSuite to complete the connection.
13.31 How do I set tones on my phone?
1.
To set the phone ringtone:
Go to Settings > Devices > Sound > Call ringtone & vibration, and select an audio file
you want.
2.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
To enable or disable vibration for incoming calls and messages:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
On the messaging screen, touch the menu icon then Settings, and touch Tone. Select an
audio file you want.
3.
To set a custom song as the ringtone and message tone:
Go to Files. Touch and hold an audio file and touch Set as > Card 1 phone ringtone,
Card 2 phone ringtone, or Notification ringtone.
4.
To set a ringtone for a contact group:
No.
5.
To disable touch sounds:
Go to Settings > Device > Sound, and deselect the Touch sounds check box.
13.32 How do I set a screen unlock PIN?
1.
Go to Settings > All > Privacy & security > Screen lock & passwords > Password >
PIN.
2.
Under Input your PIN, enter a PIN.
3.
Enter the PIN again and touch OK.
4.
When you power on the phone or press the power button to turn on the screen, the
unlock screen is displayed. Enter your PIN and touch OK to unlock the screen.
13.33 How do I set a screen unlock pattern?
For the EMUI 3.1, go to Settings > All > Privacy & security > Screen lock & passwords >
Password > Pattern.
13.34 What can I do if I forget the unlock pattern?
Your phone will not be locked even if you incorrectly draw the unlock pattern for several
consecutive times, but you will have to wait for a while until you can try again.
If you forget your unlock pattern, please send your phone to the local customer service center
or update your phone. Your phone can't be unlocked using an email from Gmail.
13.35 How do I lock and unlock the screen?
To lock the screen, press the power button.
To unlock the screen, press the power button to turn on the screen and use a screen unlock
method, such as entering the PIN or drawing the unlock pattern.
13.36 How do I add and remove an alarm?
On the home screen, go to Clock.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
Touch Add in the lower left corner and perform the following operations:
Under Alarm, set the alarm time.
To set the alarm to repeat on certain days, select the desired intervals under Repeat.
To set a tone for the alarm, touch Ringtone and select a tone.
To set your phone to vibrate when the alarm goes off, turn on Vibrate.
To name the alarm, touch Label.
Touch the check icon in the upper right corner.
On the alarm screen, you can find the list of all alarms. Use the slider to turn on or off an
alarm.
Touch and hold an alarm. In the displayed option menu, touch the delete icon (red) to delete
the alarm.
13.37 How do I set the Weather app?
On the home screen, go to Weather.
On the displayed screen, flick your finger left or right to view the weather of different cities.
To refresh the weather information, drag down on the screen.
To add a city, touch Add city. When you press and hold a city, the weather information of the
city can be deleted.
To configure other weather settings, touch the settings button at the bottom of the same screen.
You can then set the temperature unit, whether tones, auto update, and update interval.
13.38 How do I view the Developer options?
To view the developer options, go to Settings. Touch All > About phone and touch the build
number seven times in rapid succession.
USB debugging: Enable USB debugging mode that allows the operator to use the adb
command to debug the phone.
Stay awake: The screen will never turn off when your phone is charging.
Allow mock locations: Allow the phone to use the mock locations function.
Desktop backup password: Set the backup password.
Pointer location: Display information about the currently selected item.
Show touches: Show visual feedback for touches.
Show CPU usage: Show current CPU usage.
Force GPU rendering: Use 2D hardware acceleration in apps.
Animation scale: Control the animation scale.
Background process limit: Limit the number of background processes.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
Show all ANRs: Show the "App Not Responding" dialog box for background apps.
13.39 How do I free up internal storage space?
Delete unwanted files as follows: On the home screen, go to Files. Touch and hold the file or
folder you want to delete and choose Delete from the displayed option menu.
13.40 How do I turn on or off airplane mode?
On the home screen, touch Settings > Wireless & networks. Then, turn on or off Airplane
mode. In airplane mode, your mobile network will be unavailable.
Go to the notification panel and turn on or off Airplane mode.
Press and hold the power button and choose Airplane mode from the displayed option menu.
13.41 How do I restore my phone to its factory settings?
On the home screen, go to Settings > Privacy & security > Backup & reset > Personal
data > Factory data reset.
Touch Reset phone.
13.42 How does my phone enter or exit safe mode?
To enter safe mode, during the start-up animation, press and hold the volume down button
until Safe mode is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.
To disable safe mode, restart your phone.
13.43 Does my phone support HDMI?
No.
13.44 Does my phone support TV-out?
No.
13.45 Does my phone support OTG?
Yes.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
OTG is a USB transmission technology that allows a phone to connect to a USB flash drive,
digital camera, keyboard, or mouse using an OTG cable and play HD videos.
13.46 Can I use other power adapters than the provided
one to charge my phone?
Yes. Your phone has a charging protection circuit. Nevertheless, it is recommended that you
use the power adapter provided with your phone, because non-standard power adapters may
generate excessive current that shortens your battery's life span or insufficient current that
prolongs the charging time.
13.47 How do I enter recovery mode?
When an update package is available on your microSD card or an online update package is
downloaded, power off your phone, simultaneously press and hold the power and volume up
buttons to enter recovery mode. In recovery mode, press the volume up and volume down
buttons to scroll through the options, and press the power button to select an option.
13.48 How do I use the multi-screen function?
I. For devices supporting the Mirror (Huawei proprietary protocol used for connecting to
Huawei MediaQ device) and DLNA protocols (multimedia box), the Wi-Fi network is
required. To set multi-screen, perform the following steps:
1.
Connect the TV to the multimedia box that supports the Mirror or DLNA protocol.
2.
Connect the box and your phone to the same LAN.
3.
Access the multi-screen search box using any of the three methods.
−
Flick down from the status bar and touch the multi-screen icon.
−
On the playback screen of the music player that comes with your phone, touch the
multi-screen icon in the upper right corner.
−
On the playback screen of the video player that comes with your phone, touch the
multi-screen icon in the upper right corner.
4.
If other devices exist in the same LAN, a pop-up box is displayed to display the searched
devices.
5.
Touch the device, to enable the device and the TV to share data.
II. For devices that support the Wireless Display technology (for example, MiTV), perform
the following steps to set the multi-screen:
Issue 01 (2015/03)
6.
Connect the TV to the multimedia box that supports the Wireless Display technology.
7.
Turn on Wi-Fi on your phone.
8.
Access the multi-screen search box using any of the three methods.
−
Flick down from the status bar and touch the multi-screen icon.
−
On the playback screen of the music player that comes with your phone, touch the
multi-screen icon in the upper right corner.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
−
9.
On the playback screen of the video player that comes with your phone, touch the
multi-screen icon in the upper right corner.
If other devices exist in the same LAN, a pop-up box is displayed to display the searched
devices.
10. Touch the device, to enable the device and the TV to share data.
13.49 Does my phone support power-on/off tone? If yes,
how do I turn off the power-on/off tone?
Your phone supports power-on tone but not power-off tone. You can set the tone volume using
volume buttons. You can set the tone to mute mode using the volume down button. In this way,
the power-on tone is turned off.
13.50 How do I query my phone number?
Go to Settings > About phone > Status > Network to query your number. If the number is
displayed as Unknown or no specific number is displayed, the phone number may not be
saved in the SIM card, which is common for China Mobile subscribers.
13.51 How do I enter USB debugging mode?
By default, the Developer options are hidden for your phone before delivery.
1.
Go to Settings > About phone.
2.
Touch the build number several times in rapid succession until a message is displayed to
indicate that you have entered developed mode.
3.
Go back to the Settings screen, touch Developer options, and touch USB debug.
13.52 How do I disable power-intensive notification?
Go to Settings, and touch Power saving. Touch the menu icon then Settings, and disable
Power-intensive prompt.
13.53 Why are the shortcut switches hidden in the
notification panel?
1.
The shortcut switches are set to be hidden in the notification panel.
On the Settings screen, touch Notification panel, and touch Notification settings.
2.
When ultra power saving mode is enabled, the shortcut switches in the notification panel
are hidden.
On the home screen in ultra power saving mode, touch Exit.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.54 Which system sounds can be configured on my
phone?
Select or deselect the corresponding check boxes to enable or disable sound effects.
1.
Dial pad touch sound: play tone when the dialing keypad is touched.
2.
Touch sound: play sound when you touch the screen.
3.
Screen lock sound: play sound when the screen is locked.
4.
Screenshot capture sound: play sound when the screenshot is captured.
5.
Vibrate on touch: screen vibrates when you touch the back, home, menu or recent button.
13.55 How do I customize the shortcut switches in the
notification panel?
1.
Open the notification panel and touch
2.
Touch
to expand the shortcut switch list.
3.
Drag a switch shortcut to a new position
positio in the list.
to customize the shortcut switches.
13.56 How do I view phone information such as the
operating system version?
Go to Settings,, touch About phone and then flick up your finger to view your phone's
operating system version.
13.57 How do I set the flip
flip-to-mute function?
On the Settings screen,
en, touch Motions and gestures> Flip.. Select the mute function for
different apps.
13.58 How do I add a Calendar widget to the home screen?
1.
On a home screen, press and hold a blank area to display the Set as home screen
interface.
2.
Touch Widgets.
Widgets
3.
Drag Calendar to the corresponding screen thumbnail.
If the home screen doesn't have enough space, your phone will automatically create a new home screen to
the right-hand
hand side of the original and place the widget on the new home screen. You can have nine home
screens at most.
4.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Touch
to return to the home screen.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
37
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.59 How do I display the birthday in the calendar?
On the Calendar screen, open the options menu and touch Calendar to display.
display Touch
Birthdays.
If you create a xxx birthday event, your phone automatically identifies the activity and marks
it in the calendar.
If you save the birthday information of the contacts, your phone automatically creates
birthday reminders and marks
mark them in the calendar.
13.60 How do I create events in the calendar?
calend
1.
In the Calendar screen, touch
2.
Enter event details, such as the event name, time, location, and how often it repeats.
3.
When you are done, touch Save.
.
13.61 How do I delete events from the calendar?
1.
On the calendar screen, touch the options menu and touch Delete events
events.
2.
Select the events in the calendar.
3.
Touch Delete.
13.62 What can I do if I forget the password of an
encrypted backup file?
If you forget the encryption password, the backup file can't be used.
Therefore, set a password that is easy to remember for
for backup files and set the password
prompts.
13.63 How do I enable One
One-hand UI mode?
On the Settings screen, touch One-hand UI to enable this mode.
Only certain large-screen
screen phones support this function.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
38
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.64 Why can't I use gloves mode?
On the Settings screen, enable Gloves mode.
After gloves mode is enabled, if you can't use your phone, change a thinner glove.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
39
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.65 How do I download the font package?
Go to Themes > Category. Touch Font style.
13.66 How do I effectively identify the bullet items and
processed items in the Notes?
On a new Notes screen, add the bullet mark to an item. When you go back to the Notes screen,
you can see that a "-" is prefixed to the bullet item.
Touch Notes and access the editing screen. Select a bullet item. When you go back to the
Notes screen, you can see that a "√" is prefixed to the processed item.
13.67 Why can't I open the music player when I
double-touch the lock screen?
Currently this function is not supported.
13.68 Why can't I directly open the app after I draw the
corresponding letter on the screen?
To protect your information security, your phone does not skip the password unlock step after
you draw a letter.
13.69 Does my phone support suspend buttons?
Yes.
13.70 How do I enable the suspend buttons?
Touch Settings. In the Smart assistance area, touch More > Suspend buttons. Then, enable
the suspend buttons.
13.71 Can I change the positions of the suspend buttons?
You can drag the suspend buttons and move them along the left and right edges of the screen.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.72 Can I change the positions of each key in the
suspend buttons?
No.
13.73 How do I change the magazine unlock wallpapers?
On the lock screen, touch the information shown in the lower left corner and flick up the
screen. Touch Previous or Next to view the unlock wallpapers. Touch Pause to keep showing
your favorite wallpaper. Touch Settings to subscribe your favorite pictures.
13.74 Why does my phone automatically change
wallpapers?
The live wallpapers function is enabled. To disable this function,
function, press and hold a blank area
on the home screen, touch Wallpapers, and disable Shake to change or Random change
change.
13.75 How can my phone not display the corner mark of
the icons on the home screen?
The EMUI 3.1 system supports the corner mark hiding function.
function. To disable the corner mark,
perform the following steps:
Press and hold a blank area on the home screen, touch Home settings > Badge app icons
icons.
Then, you can disable the corner marks for certain apps or all apps. For example, if you do not
want your phone
ne to display the corner marks, disable the Settings option.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
41
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.76 Can the app icons on the home screen automatically
align with each other?
Enable the automatic alignment function as follows:
On the home screen, press and hold a blank area (without icons), touch Home settings
settings, and
touch Auto-align.. If you delete an app, another app automatically fills in its position.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
42
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.77 How do I disable the news function on the home
screen?
The EMUI 3.1 system supports the news function. To disable the news function, perform the
following steps:
On the home screen, press and hold a blank area (without icons), touch Home screen ssettings
and disable NewsFeed.
NewsFeed. NewsFeed can recommend your favorite information for you. The app
icon is located on the leftmost screen and is not displayed if you disable it.
13.78 What is NewsFeed?
The EMUI 3.1 system supports the NewsFeed function, which can recommend your favorite
information for you. The app icon is located on the leftmost screen and is not displayed if you
disable it.
To enable this function, on the home screen, press and hold a blank area (without icons),
touch Home screen
creen settings and enable NewsFeed.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
43
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.79 Why can't the home screen circularly slided?
On the home screen, press and hold a blank area (without icons), touch Home screen settings
and enable Circular sliding. This function can't coexist with NewsFeed. Therefore, disable
NewsFeed before enabling this function.
13.80 Can I manually adjust the size of the Widgets?
You can press and hold certain Widgets such as Gallery and Music to adjust their sizes.
13.81 How do I change the folder name?
Press and hold, instead of touching, the folder name to modify it.
13.82 Why is the circular sliding function unavailable?
This function can't coexist with NewsFeed. Therefore, disable NewsFeed before enabling this
function.
13.83 How do I set the unlock pattern?
For the EMUI 3.1, go to Settings > All > Privacy & security > Screen lock & passwords >
Screen lock style.
13.84 How do I set my phone to display the network
speed?
Go to Settings > All > Display, and enable Display network speed.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.85 How do I hide the navigation bar after enabling the
Touchplus function?
Go to Settings > All > Smart assistance > Touchplus,
Touchplus and enable Film navigation keys.
keys
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
45
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.86 Why is the screen
een zoomed out and isn't the content
displayed in full screen?
When you flick left and right in the navigation bar area, you can trigger the One
One-hand UI
function.
To disable the One-hand
hand UI function, go to Settings > All > Smart assistance > One-hand
UI, and disable One--hand layout.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
46
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
47
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.87 Why does my phone often display Touch-disable?
Touch-disable mode is designed to prevent your phone from misoperation due to the extrusion
or slip in the pocket.
You can disable this function under Settings > All > Smart assistance > More >
Touch-disable mode. Ensure that no object blocks the top part of your phone when you turn
on the screen.
13.88 Why is only a part of movie downloaded even if I set
my phone to download it for a long period of time?
A similar scenario is: A user set the phone to download a movie and turned off the screen. In
the next morning, the user found that the Wi-Fi connection was interrupted and only a part of
the movie had been downloaded.
To address this issue, make sure your phone keeps the Wi-Fi connection in sleep mode. Go to
Settings, touch a Wi-Fi connection, and select the Show advanced options check box. Set
Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep to Always. Otherwise, after the screen is turned off for a while,
the Wi-Fi connection is interrupted.
13.89 Why is Wi-Fi disabled after I enable a Wi-Fi hotspot?
When you enable Wi-Fi, your phone works as a receiver; and when your enable the Wi-Fi
hotspot, your phone works as a transmitter. However, your phone can't work as both receiver
and transmitter simultaneously.
13.90 How can I disable the notification displayed when I
turn off Wi-Fi?
This notification is displayed to prevent you from using data traffic when the Wi-Fi
connection is interrupted. You can disable the notification in the following way:
Go to Settings > Wireless & networks > Mobile networks > Mobile data switch reminder.
Deselect Ask whether to resume mobile data.
13.91 Why is the automatic rotation function invalid?
When you enable the One-hand UI function and use the small screen mode, your phone does
not support automatic rotation.
13.92 Why is there no ringtone for the alarm?
1.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Check the volume.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
Go to Settings > Sound > Volume > Alarms. Make sure the volume is larger than 0.
2.
Enable the alarm ringtone in mute mode.
Go to Clock > Alarm. Touch the Settings icon and select Alarm in silent mode.
13.93 How do I hide/display the service provider name in
the status bar?
Go to Settings > All > Display, and enable/disable Display carrier name.
13.94 Why is the notification panel background blurred
after I flick down the status bar?
This effect is achieved by adding a Gaussian Blur effect on the wallpaper of the home screen.
The background color is associated with the wallpaper color. You can change a wallpaper and
experience it again. Currently, the effect of background color of overlapped white wallpapers
is not good.
13.95 Why does my phone still display the 3G icon after I
turn off the data services?
The 3G indication in the signal box indicates signals instead of data services.
13.96 Why is the status bar displayed in the notification
panel when I flick the status bar down?
When notifications exist in the notification panel, the notification panel is displayed if you
flick down the screen; when no notification exists in the notification panel, the switch bar is
displayed if you flick down the screen.
13.97 Why is the screen suddenly zoomed out and
displayed near the lower left corner or lower right corner?
Your phone provides the One-hand UI function that facilitates you operating your phone with
one hand. When you flick left the virtual button bar at the lower part of the screen, the screen
is zoomed out to the left; when you flick right the virtual button bar, the screen is zoomed out
to the right. When you flick to a reverse direction, the screen resumes to the normal size. If
you do not need this function, you can disable it as follows:
To disable the One-hand UI function, go to Settings > All > Smart assistance > One-hand
UI, and disable One-hand layout.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.98 Why is the voice assistant automatically activated
and why does it prompt for inputting the speech
awareness instruction again?
You may have enabled the speech awareness function and your phone detects the wakeup
keywords. You are suggested to use customized wakeup keywords to prevent misoperation.
To set the speech awareness function, go to Settings > All > Smart assistance > Speech
awareness.
13.99 What is Smartcare?
The Smartcare can help you plan the flight, conference, and hotel reservation according to
your life information and send reminders to you in a timely manner.
The Smartcare function will use certain of your personal information (contact, message, and
location).
13.100 What event types does the Smartcare provide?
In the EMUI 3.1 system, the Smartcare includes the following events: Flight, Train, Hotel,
Weather, Meeting, Birthday, Rest, and Commute.
For example, the flight, train, and hotel events remind you to make arrangement according to
the keywords such as date and time in the reservation messages.
The weather event can alert you the sudden change of the weather.
13.101 How do I enable the Smartcare function?
1.
Touch Settings.
2.
On the All tab, touch Smartcare, and enable it.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.102 Does my phone support the Smartcare function?
Yes.
13.103 How do I set Touch-disable?
1.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Touch Settings.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
P8 Smartphone FAQs
2.
13 System settings
On the All tab, go to Smart assistance > More > Touch-disable mode,, and enable
Touch-disable.
disable.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.104 How do I tell whether my phone is authentic?
On the home screen, go to HiCare > Service, and touch Phone authentication
authentication. You can
identify your phone according to the onscreen instructions
instructions using various modes such as
website query, phone query, and message query.
13.105 What can I do if my phone keeps displaying the
update information?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Make sure you have properly insert
inserted the 4G card in the 4G card tray.
2.
Make sure your 4G card has sufficient
sufficie 4G traffic quota.
3.
Make sure your location is covered by the 4G network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
51
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.106 How do I view all reminders of the Smartcare?
Make sure you have enabled the Smartcare function.
In the notification panel, touch
in the upper right corner to enter the Smartcare
reminder center. Then, you can view the current reminders. When a special reminder is
generated,
is changed to the special reminder icon.
You can view history reminders by touch
center.
in the upper right corner in the reminder
13.107 Why doesn't my phone send me smart itinerary
reminders?
Check whether the following conditions are met:
1.
The smart itinerary is available only for the EMUI 3.1 system.
2.
Network connection is required.
3.
The flight, train, and hotel reminders require the information read from the reservation
messages. If you do not receive the successful reservation messages, your phone can't
plan and reminder your itineraries.
4.
The commute and rest reminder functions need to periodically learn your rest and work
time in your home and wor
work place through network connection.
5.
The birthday reminder function requires the birthday information saved in the contacts.
13.108 When does my phone send me smart itinerary
reminders?
The time is determined by the trip date in the successful reservation messag
messages. The flight,
train, and hotel reminders are sent one day in advance.
13.109 How do I set the birthday reminder using the
Smartcare?
You can set the birthday reminder in the EMUI 3.1 system.
To enable the birthday reminder in the Smartcare, perform the following
following steps:
1.
On the Settings screen, touch Smartcare.
2.
Enable Smartcare, and enable Birthday in Event categories.
Create the birthday record in the contact information.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
52
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
On the Contact screen, select a contact and touch Edit.
Touch Add another field > Birthday. Select the date.
Touch Done.
Touch the "√" icon in the upper right corner of the screen to save the settings.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
13.110 Can the Smartcare function remind me of the
weather change?
Yes.
The Smartcare can push weather change notifications according to the local weather forecast
information provided by the Weather app.
13.111 Can the Smartcare send flight reminders?
Yes.
The Smartcare can send flight information one day in advance according to the flight
information in the successful booking messages and remind you to depart in time and plan for
the route to the airport.
13.112 Can the Smartcare send train reminders?
Yes.
The Smartcare can send train information one day in advance according to the train
information in the successful booking messages and remind you to depart in time and plan for
the route to the train station.
13.113 Can the Smartcare send hotel reminders?
Yes.
The Smartcare can send hotel address, phone number, and navigation according to the
received successful reservation messages after you arrive at the destination city.
13.114 Can the Smartcare send conference reminders?
Yes.
The Smartcare can send conference reminders 10 min in advance according to the received
conference notification messages or emails.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
13.115 How do I set the status bar not to display
notifications?
In Phone Manager, touch Notification center. Select the corresponding apps and deselect
the Allow notifications check box. After the check box becomes unavailable, the notifications
for these apps are not displayed in the status bar.
13.116 Can I set One-hand UI mode?
The EMUI 3.1 system provides a lazy mode that allows you to flick left and right in the
virtual navigation bar to achieve One-hand UI.
1.
When you flick left or right the navigation bar, you can enter the One-hand UI screen.
2.
When you flick the navigation bar in a reverse direction, you can exit the One-hand UI
screen.
You can set the one-hand layout and shifting keyboard under Settings > One-hand UI.
13.117 Why does my phone often automatically switch
over One-hand UI mode?
After One-hand UI mode is enabled, the keypad identifies the hand-held state to adjust the
keypad size, facilitating the One-hand UI. In One-hand UI mode, you can tilt your phone to
display the keypad at left, at right, or in the middle. To set this function, go to Settings > All >
Smart assistance > One-hand UI.
13.118 Why does my phone automatically make a call?
The quick calling function is triggered. When your screen is off, if you press and hold the
volume down button, your phone will play a tone (dingdong), and automatically dial a
contact's number after you speak that contact within 5 seconds.
13.119 Why are the suspend icons disordered after I restart
my phone?
After you restart your phone, the suspend icons resume to the default positions instead of the
positions that you set.
13.120 How can I hide the apps such as WeChat?
The privacy protection function allows you to hide apps in visitor mode.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
P8 Smartphone FAQs
13 System settings
Go to Settings > Privacy & security > Security > Privacy protection > Private apps. Then,
select the apps to be hidden in visitor mode, for example, WeChat or Weibo.
13.121 What is the Touchplus function?
The Touchplus function is a special screen protective film with navigation buttons developed
by Huawei. When your phone uses this screen protective film, there are certain touch areas in
the upper and lower parts of the screen, where you can perform shortcut functions.
13.122 How do I enable the Touchplus function?
Go to Settings > All > Smart assistance > Touchplus, and enable the Touchplus function.
13.123 How do I use the touch areas in the upper part of
the screen after I attach the touchplus film to my phone?
Go to Settings > All > Smart assistance > Touchplus, and set the desired functions in the
upper left corner (upper right corner) of the screen.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
P8 Smartphone FAQs
14 System software
14
System software
14.1 Why does my phone fail to start up, repeatedly restart,
or not respond when I press and hold the power button?
1.
Make sure your phone is not out of battery. When you charge your phone, the charging
indicator blinks. Wait for a while and then try powering up your phone. (If your phone
allows you to back up the data, immediately back up the data in microSD card or in other
manners.)
2.
If your phone can't detect your card, press and hold the power button for 10s to forcibly
restart your phone. Then, check whether the issue is solved.
3.
Download complete ROM software package corresponding to your phone version from
the official EMUI website.
4.
Decompress the software package in a dload folder. Save this folder in the root directory
of the microSD card using a card reader.
5.
Power off your phone. Then, press the volume up, volume down, and power buttons
simultaneously. Your phone forcibly update the firmware and automatically powers on
after the updating is complete. For details, refer to
http://jingyan.baidu.com/article/cdddd41c80395f53cb00e12e.html.
Alternatively, connect your phone to the computer using a USB cable. Press and hold the
power button and volume up button simultaneously for 10s. In one or two minutes, the phone
displays the recovery screen. After it is connected to the Wi-Fi network, it downloads the
software packet and performs system update.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
14.2 Why does my phone run slowly when the battery
level is low?
When your phone's battery level is less than 10%, to preserve the battery life, your phone's
performance will be restricted.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
P8 Smartphone FAQs
14 System software
14.3 Why does the game app run slowly?
1.
Try the game app using another phone. If the game app also runs slowly, this problem is
caused by the game app instead of your phone.
2.
Check whether your phone is hot. According to Huawei specific heat protection design,
your phone's performance is limited to provide comfortable touch feeling and to protect
the phone. You can set your phone at a proper temperature when you play games on your
phone, and set power saving mode to Normal under Phone Manager > Power saving.
3.
Check whether the battery level is low. At low battery level, to extend the phone usage
and protect your phone, your phone's performance is limited. You can charge your
phone.
4.
When you play games, check whether any download task is implementing on the
background. File copying operations increase the load of the phone.
5.
If the game requires network connection, check the network status. The performance is
also affected by unstable network connections.
6.
If the issue is not caused by any of the above reasons, refer to the solution to slow system
performance.
14.4 Why does the system of my phone run slowly?
1.
Check whether your phone is hot. According to Huawei specific heat protection design,
your phone's performance is limited to provide comfortable touch feeling and to protect
the phone. To set your phone at a proper temperature, set power saving mode to Normal
under Phone Manager > Power saving.
2.
Check whether the battery level is low. At low battery level, to extend the phone usage
and protect your phone, your phone's performance is limited. You can charge your
phone.
3.
Check whether any download task is implementing on the background. File copying
operations increase the load of the phone.
4.
Check whether third-party security software, anti-virus software, or other problematic
app is installed. You are suggested to regularly perform health check on your phone and
uninstall the related software.
5.
Check whether there is no space in the storage. If only hundreds of MB is available, open
Phone Manager and touch Phone accelerator to kill apps that you are currently not
used, or manually deleted some large files.
6.
Check whether the quality of the microSD card is poor. You can remove the microSD
card or replace a microSD card and check whether the performance is improved.
7.
If only hundreds of MB is available on the microSD card, open Phone Manager and
touch Phone accelerator to kill apps that you are currently not used, or manually deleted
some large files.
8.
For online apps, check whether the phone uses data traffic or Wi-Fi network. The
performance is also affected by unstable network connections.
9.
Check whether your phone is powered on for a long period of time, for example, half a
month. Restart your phone to check whether the performance is improved.
10. Check whether the screen is frozen and the system displays non-responded screen when
the system is stuck. If yes, the app works improperly. You can update the app, use the
app for a while, and find out the regularity of this issue.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
P8 Smartphone FAQs
14 System software
11. If the issue is not caused by any of the above reasons, provide information about detailed
scenarios, specific operations, app version, and probability of occurrence to Huawei
technical support engineers.
14.5 Why is the app loaded slowly?
1.
Try using this app on another phone. If the issue also occurs, it is caused by the app
instead of your phone.
2.
Go to Phone manager > Power saving > Settings > History of power-intensive apps.
Then, check whether the app is protected. You are suggested to set the app to the
protected state. If the app is not protected, your phone kills the app after the screen is
locked for saving power. As a result, the app can't be loaded quickly in the next time.
14.6 Why is the app in the folder loaded slowly?
This issue is caused by poor app performance. The app does not have a welcome page. You
can update the app to the latest version.
(If the issue persists, provide detailed information such as app name and version to Huawei
technical support engineers.)
14.7 Why can't I disable the traffic monitoring function?
1.
Go to Settings > All > Data usage > Traffic manager > Package settings. After you
complete the settings for the first time, the settings take effect immediately. You can
disable Automatic calibration if you do not want to receive the traffic notifications.
2.
If you do not want to set the data plan, do not manually set this function.
3.
If you have set the data plan but want to cancel it, you can back up the data and restore
the factory settings. (Exercise caution when you restore the factory settings because all
user data will be erased.)
14.8 Why are the suspend icons disordered after I restart
my phone?
After you restart your phone, the suspend icons resume to the default positions instead of the
positions that you set.
14.9 Why doesn't the indicator blink when a notification is
received during charging?
The indicator preferentially displays the charging status. Therefore, it does not prompt for the
notification during charging.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
P8 Smartphone FAQs
14 System software
14.10 Why is the screen suddenly zoomed in and a blue
frame displayed around the screen?
Go to Settings > Accessibility > Magnification gesture. Check whether the magnification
gesture is enabled. If yes, you can touch the magnification gesture to disable it.
14.11 Why is there a blinking red frame on the screen?
You may have enabled the developer options that are hidden in the system and selected strict
mode under Settings > Developer options > Strict mode enabled. The developer options are
for the programmers. Therefore, you are suggested to disable the developer options.
14.12 Why does the screen display the clock only in certain
area and what can I do if the touchscreen does not
respond?
The leather case mode may be triggered. If your phone is not attached with a leather case,
disable the leather case mode under Settings > All > Smart assistance > More > Smart
cover.
14.13 Why is the calculator open after I unlock the screen?
There are two possible reasons:
1.
On the lock screen, flick up the screen and touch Calculator can open the calculator.
Therefore, the calculator is triggered by mistake.
2.
The theme is problematic. You can change the theme in the Theme app.
14.14 How do I set a voice mailbox number?
You can enter the voice mailbox number in Settings > Apps > More > Call > Voicemail
settings > Voicemail number. You can get this number when you subscribe to the voice
mailbox service in a service counter. If you forget this number, you can call your carrier's
service number (for example, 10086 for China Mobile) and retrieve this number.
14.15 How can I use the backup function in Settings?
This function is available for the Google account. If the GMS app is not installed, this
function is unavailable. You can install a Google app (for example, Gmail and Google Play),
log in to the Google account, and then use the backup function. Generally, the data that needs
to be backed up on the cloud includes contacts, Wi-Fi password, and browser labels.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
P8 Smartphone FAQs
14 System software
14.16 Why does my phone often prompt "XX app restricted
from accessing location info"?
The apps installed in your phone, including the third-party apps, may read the private data on
your phone, make calls, send messages, or open the camera. To protect your system security,
Phone Manager manages the permissions of all apps. You can set the app permissions as
follows:
1.
Go to Settings > Privacy & security > Permission manager.
2.
Open Phone Manager, flick left to open the second function screen and touch
Permission manager.
Then, you can set the app permissions according to your requirements.
14.17 How do I disable the traffic notification function?
Go to Settings > All > Traffic manager > Package settings > Automatic calibration.
Disable Automatic calibration.
14.18 How do I disable the permission prohibition
notifications?
Touch the corresponding notification in the notification panel and open the permission
prohibition records. Disable the function of displaying the notifications. To enable the
notifications, open Phone Manager, flick to the second screen and go to Permission
manager > Settings > Permission restriction history. Enable the notifications.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
15
Battery, charging, and power
consumption
15.1 What is my phone's temperature rise?
1. Your phone meets the international standards and its temperature rise is lower that most
products of its class in the industry.
2. If the customer requires specific statistics, explain the standards in detail (the hotline
personnel shall not directly describe the statistics to the customer):
Based on the EN 60950-1, the maximum temperature for metal is 60 degrees, glass 70 degrees,
and plastics 85 degrees for short-term contact; the maximum temperature for metal is 55
degrees, glass 65 degrees, and plastics 75 degrees for long-term contact.
15.2 Why does my phone generate heat when I am using
it?
It is normal for a smartphone to generate heat when it is consuming its battery power. Android
phones allow multiple applications to simultaneously run in the background. However, some
third-party applications keep connecting to the network or running in the background, which
consumes battery power. Generally your phone's temperature gets higher as it consumes more
battery power. When you sense obvious heat generated by your phone, check whether your
phone's power consumption is normal (Settings > Power saving > Background
power-intensive apps). Close power-intensive apps not in use if any. To prevent your phone
from generating excessive heat due to sunlight, do not use your phone for a long time under
sunlight in summer or place your phone on the front of your car under sunlight for navigation
purposes.
15.3 Why does my phone generate excessive heat when I
watch videos?
Video players differ in power consumption due to different codecs. It is recommended that
you use a hardware codec with low power consumption. The pre-installed gallery and video
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
player on your phone have low power consumption and generate less heat. It is recommended
that you use the pre-installed video player (choose the advanced player when playing videos).
Do not watch videos while your phone is charging.
15.4 What can I do if my phone generates heat when I
browse web pages?
1. To reduce heat generated by your phone when you are surfing the Internet, make sure the
signal strength occupies at least three bars.
2. Use the native browser to surf the Internet.
3. If you are using a third-party browser, set it to no-picture browsing mode.
15.5 What can I do if my phone generates excessive heat
when I am playing games?
Games consume more battery power than calls, videos, and music. It is recommended that
you do not play games while your phone is charging. Also you can close all background
applications when you are playing games or set the volume level to medium to reduce the heat
and increase your phone's battery life.
15.6 Why does my phone generate excessive heat when I
am playing songs?
It is normal if you feel that your phone is overheated when you are listening to songs with the
screen turned on, especially in hot weathers. Your phone's music playback quality has been
improved and more heat may be generated while songs are playing. Therefore, do not play
songs through the speaker for a long time at a large volume. However, your phone may
generate excessive heat if you are listening to songs while downloading music files and
performing other operations on your phone's screen. Therefore, do not download music files
or perform other operations while you are listening to songs.
15.7 Why does my phone generate excessive heat when I
am making phone calls?
The heat generated by your phone increases rapidly when the signal reception is poor. Your
phone provides the industry leading heat control function for calls. If you still feel that your
phone generates too much heat during calls, check whether your phone's reception is poor. To
reduce the power consumption and heat generated by your phone, it is recommended that you
do not keep your screen on for a long time during calls, or charge your phone during calls.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
15.8 What can I do if my phone generates excessive heat?
1. Enable power saving mode.
Go to Settings > Power saving and choose a power saving mode. To properly allocate your
phone's battery power, it is recommended that you choose smart power saving mode for
normal use and ultra power saving mode when your phone's battery level is low.
2. Close applications that consume too much batter power.
To check the power consumption of your applications: Go to Settings > Battery and check
the power consumption of each application. If you do not often use the applications that
consume much battery power, close them.
3. Close background applications.
Touch and hold the Recent button on the navigation bar, and then swipe on the applications
not in use to close them.
4. Close applications that are running at the same time.
To close applications that are running at the same time, go to Settings > Manage apps >
Running and touch the applications not in use to close them.
5. Prevent some applications from automatically starting when you power on your
phone.
To save your phone's battery power, prevent third-party applications from automatically
starting when you power on your phone.
Go to Settings > Startup manager, deselect applications that you do not want to
automatically start when you power on your phone, and then restart your phone.
6. Prevent background applications from consuming battery power when the screen is
turned off.
To set your phone not to connect to the mobile network when the screen is turned off: Go to
Settings > Mobile networks and deselect Mobile data always on. Then your phone will
disconnect from the mobile network 30 minutes after your turn off the screen. Your phone will
reconnect to the mobile network after your turn on the screen.
7. Set your phone to be not connected to the Wi-Fi network after the screen is turned off.
It is recommended that you turn off Wi-Fi before you turn off the screen. Go to Settings >
Wi-Fi or go to the shortcut menu and turn off Wi-Fi.
8. Set a shorter time for the screen to go to sleep.
To reduce the time for the screen to go to sleep when the screen is idle: Go to Settings >
Display > Sleep and set a shorter time for the screen to go to sleep.
9. Set the screen brightness to an appropriate level.
If your screen brightness level is too high, it consumes too much battery power and may hurt
your eyes. To lower the screen brightness level or set your phone to automatically adjust its
brightness, go to Settings > Display > Brightness, and drag the brightness bar to a proper
position or enable Automatic brightness. You can also flick down from the status bar and
drag the brightness bar to adjust the screen brightness.
10. Close power-intensive applications that are running in the background.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
Your phone is provided with the function of power consumption monitoring and reminding
for background applications. If the power-intensive applications are running in the
background, a battery icon is displayed in the upper left corner of your phone. Flick down
from the top of your screen to display a screen with white background, touch the battery icon
to display a list of power-intensive applications that are running in the background, and close
the unwanted applications.
11. Update your phone to the latest version.
Updates are available for your phone from time to time to optimize the power saving settings.
It is recommended that you use the online update feature to update your phone to its latest
version. To update your phone, go to Settings > System updates.
12. Save your battery power.
When you are not using the phone, press the power button to turn off the screen.
Set the screen timeout period to a small value under Settings > Display > Sleep.
Lower the screen brightness under Settings > Display > Brightness.
Turn off Wi-Fi and Bluetooth when you do not need to use them under Settings > Wireless &
networks > Wi-Fi and Bluetooth.
Close unimportant third-party application notifications. Go to Settings > Notification center
and disable the permission for unimportant third-party application to send notifications to you.
Close protected applications under Settings > Protected apps.
Prevent applications from automatically starting when your phone is powered on under
Settings > Startup manager.
Turn off data synchronization in the background. Go to Settings and touch Accounts & sync.
Turn off the synchronization.
Turn off the mobile network by clearing Data enabled under Settings > More > Mobile
networks.
Turn off GPS by clearing GPS satellites under Settings > Location access.
15.9 Does my phone generate heat due to its poor quality?
Your phone generates heat due to multiple reasons, such as excessive current, unstable
network, and high ambient temperature, which has nothing to do with your phone's quality.
Two pieces of graphite are provided to assist your phone's heat dissipation. The heat
dissipation architecture is carefully designed and tested to bring you the optimal experience.
Your phone is also equipped with the Huawei dedicated power saving technology and
overheat protection for the circuits.
15.10 Why does my phone generate excessive heat even
when I am not using it?
For normal heat generation:
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
Your phone generates relatively less heat when you make phone calls and send messages with
normal signal reception and more heat when you take photos or shoot videos, play games that
consume much battery power, surf the Internet, and download images or files.
For exceptional heat generation:
If your phone generates excessive heat at a certain time or during standby time (at the center
of your phone and the frame near the power button) and the battery life is obviously shortened,
some applications in your phone are consuming extra battery power.
Solutions to exceptional heat generation:
1. Close unwanted power-intensive applications under Settings > Power saving >
Background power-intensive apps. The third-party guardian software continuously takes up
your phone's CPU resources, which may also result in excessive heat and high power
consumption.
2. If the preceding solution does not work, restart your phone.
3. If the preceding solution does not work, back up important data and restore your phone to
its factory settings.
15.11 Why does it take a long time to charge my phone?
1. Make sure the two ends of the data cable are properly attached to your phone and the
charger.
2. If you are using a small-load charger and a computer USB cable (that generally has a
limited current of 500 mA), the charging current is small, resulting in a long charging time. It
is recommended that you use the 5 V 2 A charger that comes with your phone.
3. Quickly reconnect your phone to the charger and make sure the charging cable connector is
properly inserted to your phone. Reinsert the charger to the charging dock and make sure the
charger is properly inserted to the charging dock.
4. If the problem persists, take your phone to an after-sales service outlet.
15.12 Why does it take a long time to charge my phone
when it is generating excessive heat?
Your phone is provided with the Huawei's unique overheat protection. When your phone is
overheated, it will limit the charging circuit. You can close some applications such as video
and games, or power off your phone. After your phone's temperature decreases, your phone
can be charged properly.
15.13 Why does my phone sometimes repeatedly restart
after it is connected to a charger and powered on?
When your battery is over discharged, the power supply is insufficient when your phone is
connected to a small-load charger, resulting in insufficient current that causes the repeated
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
restarts of your phone. Use the 5 V 2 A charger that comes with your phone to provide
sufficient current for your phone.
15.14 How do I save my phone's battery power?
1. Set your phone to close unwanted applications when you turn off the screen.
Choose Settings > Power saving > Protected apps and deselect the power-intensive
applications and other unwanted applications. Then the deselected applications will be
automatically closed after the screen is turned off.
2. Adjust your screen brightness.
To turn on ROG technology: Go to Settings > Display > Brightness and drag the slider to
adjust the screen's brightness.
3. Reduce the time for the screen to go to sleep when the screen is idle.
Go to Settings > Display > Sleep and set a shorter time for the screen to go to sleep.
15.15 Will the indicator respond when my phone's battery
level is less than 10%?
When the battery level is lower than 10% but higher than 2%, the LED is turned off, the
indicator does not blink, and event reminding will not be affected.
When the battery level is lower than 2%, the indicator is blinking red.
15.16 What can I do if my phone's standby time is short?
1. Set your phone to close unwanted applications when you turn off the screen.
Close unwanted power-intensive applications under Settings > Power saving > Background
power-intensive apps. Alternatively, you can choose Settings > Power saving > Protected
apps and deselect the power-intensive applications and other unwanted applications. If some
applications are needed in the background, they can remain unclosed. This method helps save
battery power after the screen is turned off by reducing the number of power-intensive
applications that are running in the background.
2. Adjust the screen brightness.
Go to Settings > Display > Brightness and drag the slider to lower the screen's brightness.
Use this method based on your actual situations. The screen consumes relatively much power,
so this method can help reduce the power consumption of the screen.
3. Close unwanted background applications.
Touch and hold the Recent button and swipe on the applications not in use to close them or
touch the brush icon to close them.
4. Close background programs that consume data traffic.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
Go to Phone Manager > Data traffic management > Traffic use ranking and deselect the
mobile data check boxes of the programs that are used only with Wi-Fi.
5. Uninstall unwanted power-intensive applications.
Go to Settings > Privacy & security > Location access and check for power-intensive
applications. Uninstall the unwanted applications if any and go to Huawei App Center and
search for similar applications to download.
6. Close third-party applications that are running in the background. You can also back up
important data and restore your phone to its factory settings.
Make sure your phone is in an area with good reception. Your phone consumes more power
when the signal is not strong enough.
15.17 Why is my charger overheated when charging my
phone?
The temperature rise of a charger is around 30 degrees, which means that the charger
temperature will not exceed 55 degrees under room temperature. Therefore, it is normal that
you feel the charger is overheated, especially if you are temperature-sensitive.
If you are not assured, take your charger to a service outlet for check.
If the customer requires specific statistics, explain the standards in detail (the hotline
personnel shall not directly describe the statistics to the customer):
Based on the EN 60950-1, the maximum temperature for metal is 60 degrees, glass 70 degrees,
and plastics 85 degrees for short-term contact; the maximum temperature for metal is 55
degrees, glass 65 degrees, and plastics 75 degrees for long-term contact.
15.18 Why does my phone generate heat when charging?
This is a common phenomenon. It is recommended that you do not use your phone while it is
charging.
Do not place your phone on your bed or other places with good heat preservation, because the
heat generated by charging cannot be dissipated, leading to your phone's overheating. Place
your phone at a place with good heat dissipation when charging.
To improve user experience, your phone is provided with a large-capacity battery and a 2 A
charger, which shortens the charging time but increases the generated heat. However, there are
no safety risks when your phone generates heat while it is charging. If you sense obvious heat
generated by your phone while charging, restore your phone to its factory settings or update
your phone to its latest version.
15.19 Why does my charger emit high-frequency noise in a
quiet environment?
Your 2 A charger has passed the safety standard test. The high-frequency noise is caused by
the internal transformer, which does not affect the normal use of your charger.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power cons
consumption
15.20 What can I do if my phone generates excessive heat
during standby time??
1. Make sure your WeChat version is 6.0 or later than 6.1 (not including 6.1). Uninstall 360
Safe if any.
2. Go to Settings > Power saving > Background power-intensive apps and check for
power-intensive
intensive applications that are marked red. Close or uninstall
uninstall them if you do not need
them.
To determine whether your phone is fully charged:
If you are charging your phone when it is powered on, press the power button to turn on
the screen. If the battery icon on the status bar becomes
on the lock screen, your phone is fully charged.
, or "Charged" is displaye
displayed
If you are charging your phone when it is powered off, press the power button to turn on
the screen. If the charging indicator becomes 100%, your phone is fully charged.
Note: The figures are for your reference
ref
only. The actual screens may vary.
15.21 What can I do if my phone can't properly display the
battery level?
Restart your phone or back up important data and restore your phone to its factory settings.
If the problem persists, replace the battery if it is removable. If the battery is non
non-removable,
contact an authorized Huawei service center.
15.22 What can I do if my phone fails to be charged?
If the battery power is completely used up, connect your phone to the charger and wait for
5 minutes.
Use the charger provided with your phone. If the charging failure occurs when you use the
standard charger, replace the USB cable or power socket, or restart your phone.
Your phone may fail to be charged if it is overh
overheated.
Your phone adopts an over temperature protection design that disables charging if your
phone is overheating.
Do not play games, watch videos, or use other power-intensive
power intensive applications while
charging.
If you are using a power bank to charge your phone,
phone, check that the output current matches
that of your phone's
phone charger.. For example, if the charger that comes with your phone
outputs 1 A current and the current output by the power bank is smaller or larger than 1 A,
charging failures will occur. If the output current matches that of your phone's charger and
the problem persists, use the data cable that comes with your phone to connect your phone
to the power bank and try again.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
68
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
15.23 How do I preserve my phone's battery?
Use your phone's battery from time to time. If it is not used for more than half a year, its
capacity will be significantly reduced.
Use the charger that comes with your phone to charge the battery.
Charge the battery from time to time, which can increase its lifespan. Do not wait until the
battery level becomes low.
Do not use your phone when charging.
When the battery is fully charged, disconnect it from the charger. Otherwise, the battery
and charger may be damaged.
Do not place the battery in environments with low temperature, high temperature, or
significant temperature changes, because the battery lifespan may be shortened.
15.24 How do I check the battery status?
Go to Settings > Power saving and check the remaining battery power and time.
15.25 How do I check the ranking of power-intensive
applications?
Go to Settings > Power saving to check the power consumption details. You can view or close
background power-intensive applications and view the ranking of system software and
hardware power-intensive applications.
15.26 How long should I charge the battery for the first
time?
Charge the battery until it's full.
15.27 What are the precautions when I charge my phone
for the first time?
Use the battery and charger that come with your phone.
Charge the battery from time to time, which can increase its lifespan. Do not wait until
the battery level becomes low.
When the battery is fully charged, disconnect it from the charger. Otherwise, the battery
and charger may be damaged.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
P8 Smartphone FAQs
15 Battery, charging, and power consumption
15.28 How long does it take to fully charge my phone?
The battery capacity varies by phone model, resulting in different charging times.
The indicator on your phone tells you its battery level. It turns green when the battery
level is higher than 90%. You can also check the screen for charging status.
15.29 Why can't I charge my phone after I connect it to a
computer?
The computer's USB port may have insufficient power supply.
If your phone is connected to a desktop computer, connect the data cable to the USB port
on the rear side of the computer host.
If your phone is connected to a laptop, directly use the USB port on the laptop. If you are
using an external USB port, power supply may be insufficient.
If the problem persists, use the charger to charge your phone instead.
15.30 Can I use a Huawei charger in other countries?
Huawei chargers have certain requirements in terms of the input voltage, generally 100–240 V
and 50–60 Hz. For details, see the instructions on the charger label. If the voltage in the
country or region you are currently in is within that range, you can use the charger without a
transformer.
The power plug shape may be different in other countries, so a power adapter may be
required.
15.31 Can I use a charger of other brands to charge my
phone?
Yes if the output current and voltage of the charger are the same as those of the provided
charger. For details, see the instructions on the charger label.
Use chargers that are certified and produced by trusted manufacturers. Check that there is a
certification mark on the charger label.
15.32 Will my battery's lifespan be affected if I play my
phone while charging it?
When the battery is being charged, it does not discharge and the power is provided by the
charger if you play your phone. Therefore, the battery's lifespan will not be affected.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16
Managing apps
16.1 Third-party apps
16.1.1 Why are the touch positions inaccurate when I play a game?
Most games are not designed for scenarios where the navigation bar is hidden. If you open a
game before you hide the navigation bar, the screen image is stretched but the touch positions
remain unchanged, so the touch positions are deviated on the screen when you are playing the
game.
To solve this, you can hide the navigation bar before you open the game.
16.1.2 How do I view the version of Google service framework?
Generally, phones are configured with Google service framework. Make sure the version of
the installed Google service framework is later than that of the configured one.
16.1.3 Why can't I synchronize the contacts and calendar events
from my Gmail account?
1.
Download the install the apps that should be synchronized with the contacts and calendar
events in the Gmail account, including:
Google calendar synchronization service
Google contact synchronization service
Google Play store
2.
Go to Settings > Google > Synchronize settings. Touch Sync now in the upper right
corner to synchronize the calendar events and contacts.
3.
Precautions:
The Google servers are set in China. If you fail to connect to the Google server during
synchronization, try again in different time segments.
If the system prompts "Google contact synchronization needs to read your contacts" or
"Google calendar synchronization needs to read your calendar events", touch Allow. You
can also set the app permissions under Phone Manager > Permission manager. Touch
the prohibition causes synchronization failure.
16.1.4 Why can't I install a downloaded app on my phone?
Your phone supports apps developed using JAVA. To install .jar or .jad apps, you must install
a JAVA simulator, such as Jbed.apk or GZL-signed-Jbed.apk.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.1.5 Why does the system prompt for installation failure when I
install a downloaded app?
Cause 1: Your phone's storage space is insufficient. If this happens, uninstall some apps that
you no longer use or delete some files from Files.
Cause 2: The app may not be compatible with your phone system version. Your phone is
running Android 5.0.
Cause 3: The battery level is low.
16.1.6 What can I do if the apps consume my phone's memory?
Yes, you can install third-party apps to a microSD card. Some temporary data will be saved to
your phone's memory when these apps run, which is normal.
16.1.7 Does my phone support online banking for online
shopping?
Yes. You need to download the related bank client for online shopping.
16.1.8 Why does the number hop when I start the pedometer?
The app detects whether you have continuous motion (8 or 10 steps) when you start the
pedometer. If the app detects continuous motion, it reports this data at a time and causes the
number hop. After this data is reported, the app records the steps continuously.
16.1.9 Why is the app lock invalidated after I restart my phone?
When you drag down the app to lock it under Recent apps, the app lock is invalidated after
your restart your phone.
16.1.10 Why is there a deviation between the counting of the
pedometer app and my own counting?
The app counts your steps using the pre-installed sensor, and the counting is associated with
your phone's position and your exercise habits.
16.1.11 Which device is counting after I successfully connect my
wrist band and my phone?
After your phone is connected with the wrist band, the wrist band is counting your steps.
16.1.12 Why can't I install some apps and why does my phone
prompt "repeated permissions"?
The repeated permissions function is used by the Android 5.0 system to restrict third-party
apps in customized permissions, thereby standardizing the permission app of apps and
protecting data security of users. The Android 5.0 system checks the applied permissions
when you install apps. If the new apps apply for the permissions customized by other apps
and the signatures are different, the system prompts for repeated permissions and exits the
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
installation. Huawei will try to promote the app developers to rectify the design to avoid
security risks.
16.1.13 Why is a third-party app still running after I close all the
apps at the touch of a button?
1.
Go to Settings > Manage apps > Running. Select the corresponding app and forcibly
stop it.
2.
In the app, select the exit option.
16.1.14 Why can't some apps properly work after I recover my
phone using the backup data?
The data of the backup apps may not be compatible with the Android 5.0 system. You can
uninstall it and download again from the app center.
16.1.15 How can I tell if the third-party software is compatible
with Android 5.0?
Your phone runs the Android 5.0 system, which can intelligently detect whether the
third-party app is compatible with itself. The non-compatible apps can't run in the Android 5.0
system. Huawei will try to promote the app developers to solve the compatibility issue and
guide the users to update the third-party apps in a timely manner. The following apps can be
used to detect whether the third-party apps are compatible with the Android 5.0 system:
1.
App Center
When you search for an app in the App Center, description is provided below the app
icon.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
2.
App Installer
The App Installer displays compatibility information when you use it to install the
third-party apps.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
3.
Backup
The Backup app provides the compatibility information when you use it to restore the
app data in the microSD card.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
16.1.16 Why can't I use some third-party apps on my phone?
Your phone supports the latest Android 5.0 version (L version). Some apps may not adapt to
the L version. Therefore, you can't properly use these apps. Huawei will promote the app
developers to adapt to the L version as soon as possible. According to Huawei compatibility
test, the following apps are not compatible with your phone and need to be updated by the
developers:
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
现网黑名单.xlsx
16.2 System apps
16.2.1 Why can't I open the camera?
1.
According to the Android system architecture, before an app opens the camera, the
camera used by another app must be closed first. If you can't open the camera, you may
not disable the app that uses the camera, for example, flash app or QR code scanner app.
You can disable these apps and then try opening the camera.
2.
The camera is a sensitive functional device. You may prohibit the related apps from
using the camera. Go to Phone Manager > Permission manager > Take photos or
videos. Check whether the camera access permissions are prohibited for the related apps.
You can select Notify/Allow according to actual situations.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
16.2.2 Why isn't the camera icon displayed on the home screen?
The app may be disabled for facilitating the APK management in the Android system. As a
result, you can't find the app icon.
To solve this issue:
Go to Settings > Manage apps. Check whether the camera app is disabled. If yes, enable it
manually.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
16.2.3 Why are only a few FM radio channels available? Why do
some FM radio channels have noise?
1.
Your phone uses your headset as its FM antenna. The headset your are using may not be
compatible with your phone, resulting in a limited number of available FM radio
channels or noise. It is recommended that you use the headset that comes with your
phone.
2.
The FM signals are easily interrupted. The noise may be caused by weak radio signals.
Take your phone to a place with better radio signals.
16.2.4 What will my phone do if it can't detect my voice input?
Your phone's receiver (speaker or Bluetooth headset) will display a voice message indicating
that the voice detection has ended and no valid voice input has been detected.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.2.5 Why can't I use the voice input command "turn on Wi-Fi"?
The voice assistant can't turn on Wi-Fi in offline state. There are various reading methods for
Wi-Fi in China. Your phone can't search for all reading methods in the offline state. As a result,
it can't recognize your voice input. You can use the voice input command to enable Wi-Fi only
when the network connection is available.
16.2.6 How do I disable the App Center update notifications?
Go to Settings > Notification manager. Disable the notifications for Huawei App Center.
16.2.7 Why can't I connect to the App Center?
This issue may be caused by improper route settings by the service provider or network
connection.
Solution:
1.
Provide the feedback information to the service provider.
2.
Check whether the network connection is disabled. If yes, enable it.
3.
Switch over the network to restore the connection.
16.2.8 Can I set the app preview to icon preview?
No, but you can touch the brush icon at the bottom to close the recently used apps.
16.2.9 Why does my phone display another app when I touch the
back button?
When a certain app is enabled, it rapidly enables multiple tasks and finally displays only one
task. As a result, the exit sequence is affected. In this case, when you touch the back button,
your phone displays the previously enabled app.
16.2.10 Why doesn't my phone trigger the location reminder even
if I have set it in the Notes?
Make sure the location reminder is still valid. The location reminder has an effective period. If
you do not go the specified location within this effective period, your phone will not send you
the location reminder any more.
16.2.11 Why is the Geo-fence function in the location reminder
invalid?
Your phone takes a period of time to trigger the Geo-fence function. You can continue to
access the Geo-fence and stay in the Geo-fence range for more than one minute. Check
whether the Geo-fence is effective.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.2.12 Why doesn't my phone trigger the smart travel function
even if I have set it in the Notes?
The smart travel function requires network connections. If your phone is not connected to a
network or the network quality is poor, the smart travel function will not be triggered. You can
go to a place with better network signals and then try again.
16.2.13 Why is the GPS icon always displayed in the status bar?
You may enable some apps that use the GPS navigation function, for example, A Map,
AutoNavi, and My Bus.
Solution:
1.
Disable the GPS switch when you do not require it.
2.
Disable the apps using the GPS navigation function.
16.2.14 Why can't I save the videos and songs I have downloaded
from third-party apps to the external microSD card?
1.
Go to Settings > Storage and set the default storage location to your microSD card.
2.
Open the app (such as LETV) that you want to download files from, and check whether
you can set the storage directory for the downloaded files. If yes, set the download path
to your microSD card. For specific file paths, refer to the directories of the microSD card
in Files.
If the issue persists, the videos or files are not allowed to be saved in the microSD card, which
can't be controlled on your phone.
16.2.15 How do I update, save, and subscribe the magazine unlock
wallpapers?
By default, when your phone is connected to a Wi-Fi network, it automatically detects
whether the wallpapers on the server are updated. To set the automatic update function, flick
up the screen when it is locked, and go to More > Settings > Auto-update via Wi-Fi.
Currently your phone does not support manual check for updates. To only update wallpapers
you like, touch More > Settings and select the wallpaper types under Subscriptions.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
16.2.16 Why can't I wake up my phone by double touching the
screen when the screen is turned off?
Your phone does not support the wakeup function when the screen is turned off.
16.2.17 Why does my phone automatically delete some
notification messages?
The third-party management or security apps can automatically delete messages under certain
circumstances. You can uninstall such apps to address this issue.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.2.18 Why can't I send an SMS or why does my phone display
that the SMS is being sent?
Solution:
1.
Check whether your phone's SMS center number is correctly set. For details about the
number, contact your service provider.
2.
Check whether your balance of your phone is sufficient.
3.
Check whether your message is blocked by the service provider because it contains
sensitive characters.
4.
Check whether you message is blocked by the carrier because you have sent repeated
contents to the same number.
5.
Install the SIM card in a phone of another brand and send an SMS. If the SMS fails to be
sent, contact your service provider.
6.
Back up the third-party APK and restore the factory settings. Then, try again.
If the issue persists, update the firmware to the latest version.
16.2.19 Why can't my phone receive SMS on time?
1.
Check whether the signal reception is good.
2.
Close some security protection apps and apps that use large data traffic to ensure a
smooth operation environment.
16.2.20 How do I use the voice navigation function?
In the current version, the navigation app can't be enabled using voice input in the driving
mode. You can manually enable the preconfigured navigation software in driving mode.
16.2.21 How do I make calls using the voice assistant?
Enable the voice assistant and speak the contact in your phone, for example, Dad. Currently,
your phone does not support the numeric phone numbers through voice input.
16.2.22 Why can't my phone recognize my voice input?
Make sure the network connection is normal (Wi-Fi connection or data services).
Speak loudly and clearly.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
16.2.23 Can my phone freely switch over among 4G, 3G, and 2G
networks?
It takes 150s to recover data service when you switch from a 4G network to a 2G network, or
from a 3G network to a 2G network.
Then, the data services can resume. The network icon disappears when the network is
switching. Voice calls will not be affected when you switch networks.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.2.24 Why are the icons re-arranged after I unlock the screen?
Check whether the re-arrangement by shaking the phone function or visitor mode is enabled.
16.2.25 Can I use Huawei Health app without a wrist band?
Huawei Health app supports step calculation using your phone instead of other accessories
such as wrist band. However, if you use the sleep monitoring and sedentary reminder
functions, you need a wrist band.
16.2.26 What is Myfitnesspal?
Myfitnesspal is a popular app that helps people to lose weight. After your phone is connected
to Myfitnesspal, you do not need to manually input the power consumption every day.
16.2.27 Why is the FM radio interrupted by the camera?
Due to the chip path reasons, if you enable the camera while using the FM radio function, the
FM radio exits. After you exit the camera, you need to manually enable the FM radio.
16.2.28 Why can't I choose the SIM card for making phone calls
and why does my phone make phone calls over card 1 by default?
Check whether the contact is the default contact. Currently, the third-party contact app may
take over the system contact, and the app generally does not adapt to dual cards.
16.2.29 Why can't my phone match the contact with the number in
the SMS?
Your phone can't match the number in the SMS with the contact. Your phone can only match
the number in the recipients list with the contact.
16.2.30 Why doesn't my phone play SMS tones?
Perform the following checks:
1.
Check whether the SMS tone is not played on all screens (according to the Android
native design, the system does not play tones when you receive SMSs on the detailed
message screen).
2.
Check whether the volume is set to mute (press the volume up side button).
3.
Check whether the SMS tone notification is properly set under Messaging > Menu >
Settings > General > Tone.
4.
Check whether you have enabled the do-not-disturb function.
5.
If the issue persists, restore the factory settings.
16.2.31 How do I cancel the notification message category?
Go to Settings > All > Manage apps > More > Message. Disable Archive info messages.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.2.32 Why can I read the multimedia messages only in slide
mode?
To view the multimedia messages in newspaper mode:
Go to Messaging > Menu > Settings > Advanced. Set MMS play mode to Newspaper.
16.3 App interaction exceptions
16.3.1 What can I do if I can't open the pre-installed apps (such as
call and messaging) on my phone?
1.
Use the NFF tool to check whether the phone has been rooted or reformatted. If yes,
perform related operations.
You can use another simple method to check whether the phone has been rooted:
−
Connect your phone to the computer using a USB cable.
−
Choose Start > Programs > Run. Enter cmd. Click OK.
−
Enter adb shell and click OK.
If the output is ended with "$", your phone has not been rooted.
If the output is ended with "#", your phone has been rooted.
2.
If no, back up important data and restore your phone to its factory settings.
16.3.2 Why does the third-party app installed on my phone
encounter exceptions?
The exceptions are mainly caused by the compatibility issue of software versions. Your phone
is running Android 5.0. Some apps may not be compatible with this system, so exceptions
may occur. This is not a problem caused by your software.
16.3.3 Why can't some third-party apps be displayed in full-screen
mode?
You may have disabled the suppressible buttons in the navigation bar. Go to Settings >
Navigation bar. Enable the suppressible buttons and then manually hide the virtual
navigation bar.
16.3.4 How do I clear the cache or web browsing history in the
browser?
Open your browser and touch the menu button. From the displayed option menu, choose
Settings. Touch Privacy & security then Clear cache or Clear history to clear the cache or
web browsing history.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.3.5 Can I log in to the online bank account using the browser
on my phone?
Yes. It is recommended that you install the online bank client on your phone Logging in to
your online bank account using the browser on your phone may fail as some banks' login
plug-in can only run in Internet Explorer.
16.3.6 Can I connect to the network during phone calls?
Yes, if your phone is connected to a 4G
If your phone is on a 3G network, it can access the Internet during a call.
However, no if your phone is connected to a 2G network.
16.3.7 How do I uninstall pre-installed apps?
On the home screen, touch and hold the app you want to uninstall, drag it to the trash can icon,
and follow the onscreen instructions to uninstall it.
System apps can't be uninstalled.
16.3.8 Why does my phone fail to install an app?
1.
Your phone supports third-party apps in APK format only. Make sure the app you are
trying to download is in this format.
2.
If the app is not from the app center, you need to set the phone to trust the app source
and then install the app. Go to Settings > Security. Touch Unknown sources. Then,
install the app again.
3.
The third-party app may not be compatible with your phone. Try using similar apps.
16.3.9 How do I disable the auto-startup third-party apps?
Go to the Settings screen, touch More > Startup manager, and clear the apps that you want
to forbid.
16.3.10 How do I close background apps?
1.
On the Settings screen, touch Manage apps. Select the apps and touch Force stop to
close the apps according to the onscreen instructions.
2.
If your phone is installed with Phone Manager, close the apps using Phone Manager.
On Phone Manager screen, touch Phone accelerator, and close the background apps at
the touch of a button.
16.3.11 How to I set some applications not to exit after the screen
is turned off?
Go to Power saving > Settings > History of power-intensive apps. Select the corresponding
apps.
16.3.12 How do I set the push notifications of the apps?
On the Settings screen, touch Notification manager. Touch Allow or restrict.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.3.13 How do I use a third-party
third
input method?
After you download and install the third-party
third party input method app, on the text screen, open the
notification panel and touch Select input method.. Then, you can change the input method.
16.3.14 How do I prohibit the background running of
power-intensive apps?
Go to Power saving > Settings > History of power-intensive
power
apps.. Select the corresponding
apps.
16.3.15 How do I prohibit certain apps from reading personal data
in my phone?
On Phone Manager screen, touch Permission manager.. Prohibit the corresponding apps from
readingg your personal data according to the onscreen instructions.
16.3.16 Can I uninstall Phone Manager?
There are a lot of threats to your phones at any time, for example, hackers, viruses, and
malicious fee deduction apps. Huawei Phone Manager is completely integrat
integrated with the
EMUI system and defends
defend insecure code from the bottom layer. It can perfectly protect your
phone. Therefore, you are not suggested to uninstall it.
16.3.17 How do I restore Phone Manager after I delete it?
Currently, separate Phone Manager installatio
installationn package is not provided. You can restore it as
follows:
1.
Restore your phone to its factory settings.
2.
Download the software update package from Huawei official website
(http://consume
http://consumer.huawei.com/cn/support/downloads/index.htm).
16.3.18 How do I restore the deleted Weather app?
Press and hold the blank area on the home screen and touch Widgets.. Drag the Weather app
to the screen.
16.3.19 How do I clean the app cache?
On the Settings screen, touch Manage apps. Open the All tab page. Select the corresponding
apps and touch Clear cache
cache.
16.3.20 How do I add or delete the app shortcut in the simple
home screen mode?
On the simple home screen, touch Add to add an app to the home screen; press and hold the
screen until your phone vibrates, and then touch
shortcut.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
to delete the corresponding app
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
81
P8 Smartphone FAQs
16 Managing apps
16.3.21 How do I search for an app on my phone?
Flick down the home screen to access the search screen. Then, you can view the latest apps
and enter the apps, contacts, and information in the search box.
16.3.22 How do I cancel the update notifications of Huawei App
Center?
On the Huawei App Center screen, go to TOOLS > Update manager. In the app list, touch
Ignore updates.
16.3.23 How do I move the installed apps to the microSD card?
On the Huawei App Center screen, go to TOOLS > Move apps. Touch Move apps to SD card
next to the app.
16.3.24 How do I close the suspend window pushed by the app?
On Phone Manager screen, touch Manage notifications. Allow or prohibit the suspend
window of the apps.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
P8 Smartphone FAQs
17 NFC and payment
17
NFC and payment
17.1 How do I use NFC to transfer files?
1.
Enable NFC. If you are using the China Mobile-customized phone, you need to turn on
the P2P switch.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
2.
Open an image in the Gallery or open the contact details of a contact. Then, place two
phones with the antennas close to each other.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
3.
When your phone detects that it is close to NFC phone, the screen of the image or
contact information is zoomed out and displays the information about file transfer by
touching. You can touch the screen at this time to transfer the file to the peer phone.
4.
After the file transfer is started, you can separate two phones.
17.2 Why can't NFC recognize the bus card?
1.
Check whether your phone plays any sound when it is close to the bus card.
2.
If your phone does not have the APK program to parse the bus card data, your phone
can't read the data in the bus card. You can install the ELECHONG app and try again.
3.
If your phone is not responded when it is close to the bus card, check whether the bus
card supports NFC technology. Certain bus cards do not support this technology.
17.3 Why is NFC payment insensitive or failed?
Currently, only the 4G premium version TL10 supports NFC function. NFC antenna is close
to the SIM card or microSD card under the battery cover. Therefore, try to place this part of
your phone near the POS machines when you make payment.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
P8 Smartphone FAQs
1.
17 NFC and payment
Check whether you have activated any bank card or set the bank card as the default bank
card.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
2.
Check whether the bank card is not successfully activated.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
3.
Make sure you have sufficient balance in your account.
If the problem persists, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center.
17.4 Why does the POS machine prompt for payment
failure although the payment has been successfully made?
If this issue occurs, take your phone, bound bank card, identity card, and POS machine
information (including the merchant name, merchant address, and bills if the payment is
successfully made) to the issuer bank. If the bank verifies that the POS machine is not charged,
the bank will return the money to your account within the billing cycle. The billing cycles
depend on the banks. Please consult the bank counters.
17.5 Why can't I make payment using my phone on the
ATM?
You are advised to make payment on the ATMs of the issuer bank. Make sure the ATM
supports the non-contact card function. If you encounter any issue, please contact the issuer
bank the first time.
17.6 Why is the card access failed?
You may have opened other bank clients at the same time. You can close other bank clients. If
you still can't use the wallet, restart your phone.
17.7 Can I swipe card using my phone when my phone is
powered off or the screen is turned off?
Yes.
17.8 Do I need to enable Honor Wallet when I swipe card
using my phone?
No, but you need to make sure there is sufficient balance in your account.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
P8 Smartphone FAQs
17 NFC and payment
17.9 How do I switch over the cards if I have activated
multiple bank cards?
In the bank card list or on the card details screen, set the bank card to the default card.
17.10 How do I use the card with NFC activated?
You can make payment using the card with NFC activated at any POS machine with the
QuickPass tag.
17.11 How do I make payment using my SIM card?
This function requires the SIM card that supports NFC-SWP function. You can activate the
payment function using the mobile wallet apps provided by the service provider or at the
customer counter. After you set the default payment card in Honor Wallet, you can use this
function. For details, please consult the service provider and the interpretation of the service
provider shall prevail.
17.12 How does NFC function transfer files?
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Enable NFC. If you are using the China Mobile-customized phone, you need to turn on
the P2P switch.
2.
Open an image in the Gallery or open the contact details of a contact. Then, place two
phones with the antennas close to each other.
3.
When your phone detects that it is close to NFC phone, the screen of the image or
contact information is zoomed out and displays the information about file transfer by
touching. You can touch the screen at this time to transfer the file to the peer phone.
4.
After the file transfer is started, you can separate two phones.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
P8 Smartphone FAQs
18 Backup, restoration, and update
18
Backup, restoration, and update
18.1 What can I do if my phone automatically powers off
or fails to power on after being rooted?
I. Normal recovery
1. Restore your phone to its factory settings.
Go to Settings and touch Backup & reset > Factory data reset > Reset phone. Then your
phone will restart and be restored to its factory settings. After the restoration, your phone will
restart again.
Note: The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
2. Online update
Connect your phone to a Wi-Fi network. Go to Settings > Updater > Check for updates >
New version to download and install the new version.
Note: The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
II: Forcible recovery
The following recovery methods may cause data loss. It is recommended that you back up
important data from time to time during use.
1. Software download
Visit the EMUI website to download the corresponding software.
2. Local update using a microSD card
a. Prepare a microSD card that has a capacity of more than 2 GB. Brands including SanDisk,
Kingston, and KingMax are recommended.
b. Create a dload folder in the root directory of the microSD card. Put the downloaded
UPDATE.APP update package in the dload folder. c. Connect your phone to a charger and
press and hold the volume up and down buttons. Press and hold the power button for more
than 10s to power on the phone. Then your phone will start the forcible update process using
the microSD card. Your phone may fail to be powered on because of no or few battery power.
Charge your phone before the update. Connect your phone to a charger during the update to
ensure sufficient battery power.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
P8 Smartphone FAQs
18 Backup, restoration, and update
d. Your phone will automatically complete the update process, which takes about 5 minutes. If
the update fails, start over.
18.2 Why does the online update fail?
1. Check whether your phone has been rooted and the pre-installed applications have been
removed or the system files have been modified. If so, perform the update using a microSD
card.
2. Check whether your phone's internal storage space or the microSD card's storage space is
insufficient. If so, free up the storage space and try again.
3. Check whether a microSD card is installed to your phone. If so, the microSD card may not
be compatible with your phone. Uninstall the microSD card and try again.
4. Check whether your phone's battery level is at least 20%. If not, charge your phone.
18.3 The update package is available on the entire
network. Why can't my phone detect the update package?
1. Check whether your phone has been rooted and the system files have been deleted.
2. If the system files have not been modified, touch Settings > Manage apps > All > Update >
Clear data. Switch to the mobile network or another Wi-Fi network and search for the update
package.
18.4 What can I do if my phone fails to download the
available update package?
1. Check whether your mobile or Wi-Fi network is disabled. If so, the download will not be
able to start.
2. Check whether airplane mode is enabled.
3. Check whether you have touched the pause button.
18.5 What can I do if the system update notification is still
available after my phone has just been updated?
Make sure you phone is connected to a mobile or Wi-Fi network after the update.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
P8 Smartphone FAQs
18 Backup, restoration, and update
18.6 Why does my phone display the parsing or
installation package verification failure message aft
after the
update package installation fails?
Your network condition may be poor, so the downloaded installation package is not complete.
Re-download
download the installation package. If the network condition is still poor, use another
network or download the package at another time.
18.7 How do I back up my phone data?
1. On your computer, click Home Page from the navigation area on the left, then
display the backup page.
to
2. Select data that you want to back up and the backup directory on your computer.
3. Click Next.
18.8 How do I restore data to my phone?
1. On your computer, click Home Page from the navigation area on the left, then
display the restoration page.
to
2. Select the backup files you want to restore. You can change the backup directory to view
backup files in other locations on your computer.
3. Select the data you want to restore.
4. Click Next.
18.9 Can I back up my contacts groups?
No.
18.10 What data can be backed up on my phone?
You can back up your contacts, messages, calendar events, and applications.
18.11 Why can't I enable the backup or restore function?
You need to log in to the Google account before you enable these functions.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
88
P8 Smartphone FAQs
18 Backup, restoration, and update
18.12 What data will be erased if I restore my phone to its
factory settings?
Restoring your phone to the factory settings erases all your personal data from the phone
storage, including information about your accounts, your system and application settings, and
downloaded applications.
18.13 What data will be erased after my phone is updated?
After your phone is updated, contacts, messages, email accounts, system settings, and
installed applications will be erased. Back up important data on your phone before you update
your phone.
Your phone data will not be erased if HOTA update is used.
18.14 How can I back up and restore my phone data?
You can back up and restore the system and media data on your phone using the SIM card,
microSD card, Huawei cloud account, backup application, or HiSuite.
The preceding methods may not be supported on some models.
18.15 How do I back up data to a microSD card?
Go to Settings, and touch Storage > Default storage location > SD card.
On the backup screen, touch New backup, select the data you want to back up, and follow the
onscreen instructions to back up the data to the microSD card.
18.16 How do I back up contacts to a microSD card?
Go to Settings, and touch Storage > Default storage location > SD card.
Go to the contacts list, touch the menu icon then Import/Export > Export to storage, and
follow the onscreen instructions to export contacts from your phone to the microSD card.
18.17 Why doesn't my phone receive the OTA update
notification?
OTA update notification is pushed to your phone in batches. If your phone does not receive
any OTA update notification for a long time, you can visit Huawei's official software
download website to download the latest update package. For details about how to perform
the OTA update, see the instructions in the update package.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
P8 Smartphone FAQs
18 Backup, restoration, and update
18.18 How do I permanently delete all the files on my
phone?
Touch Settings > Backup & reset > Factory data reset and select Erase internal storage to
format the internal storage space of your phone.
18.19 How do I set my phone to automatically check and
perform updates?
Go to Settings and touch Auto update > Menu > Update settings.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
P8 Smartphone FAQs
19 Fingerprint identification
19
Fingerprint identification
19.1 Does my phone support fingerprint identification?
No.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
P8 Smartphone FAQs
20 Dual systems
20
Dual systems
20.1 Does my phone support dual systems?
No.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21
Others
21.1 Why does the vibration not strong when I enter a
number on the dialer screen?
On the dialer screen, the vibration will not be as strong as that when a call comes in, which is
a normal phenomenon.
21.2 What can I do if I can't find a solution in the FAQs to
the issue that I have encountered?
Restart your phone and restore the factory settings. If the issue persists, provide the
corresponding information to Huawei technical support engineers. The issue will be solved in
updated versions.
21.3 How do I download the User Guide of my phone?
Download the User Guide corresponding to the phone model from Huawei official website
http://consumer.huawei.com/cn/support/manuals/index.htm.
21.4 Why can't I view the User Guide in phone services?
Make sure you have enabled the data services or connected to the Wi-Fi network.
21.5 Can I scan a QR code using my phone?
Yes. You need to download a QR code app first.
21.6 Does my phone support 3D acceleration?
Yes. To enable 3D acceleration, touch Settings > Developer options and touch Force GPU
rendering.
Enabling 3D acceleration improves the gaming experience, but consumes memory as well. If
you are playing a game only, great memory consumption does not affect your phone's running.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
If you are playing a game while multiple apps are running on your phone, the phone may run
slowly.
21.7 How do I know whether my phone has been rooted?
Choose Start > Programs > Run. Enter cmd. Click OK. Enter adb shell and click OK. If
the output is ended with "$", your phone has not been rooted. If the output is ended with "#",
your phone has been rooted.
If you can't perform this operation, take your phone to an authorized Huawei service center.
21.8 Does automatic time synchronization consume data
traffic?
No. The battery can't be removed.
If your phone obtains the date and time from your service provider's network when it powers
on and registers with the network, it does not use an Internet connection to synchronize date
and time, and no data traffic will be generated.
If your phone fails to obtain the date and time from your service provider's network when it
powers on and if you have enabled the automatic time update function, your phone
synchronizes the date and time with the network, which will generate minor data traffic.
21.9 Can I use my phone for recording?
Yes. Touch the Recorder in Utilities to start recording.
21.10 Does my phone come with a protective film?
Yes. A front protective film and a back protective film are delivered with your phone.
21.11 Does my phone support mobile TV?
No.
21.12 Can I browse or edit Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
PDF files on my phone?
Yes. You can open the files using third-party apps such as WPS Office, OfficeSuite, and
OliveOfficePremiu.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.13 How are my phone ROM and RAM allocated?
The ROM and RAM sizes displayed on your phone may be smaller than the values in the
phone specifications, because the system occupies a part. The memory indicated by different
users may refer to ROM or RAM.
The ROM contains system apps, files, and databases, which takes up about 6 GB.
For the phones with 16 GB ROM memory, the available memory is about 10 GB; and for the
phones with 32 GB ROM memory, the available memory is about 26 GB.
21.14 When does my phone display the notification panel
or switch shortcuts if I flick down on the home screen?
If there are unread notifications, the notification panel will be displayed when you flick down
on the home screen. Otherwise, the notification panel will be displayed when you swipe down
from the upper left corner of the screen and switch shortcuts will be displayed when you
swipe down from the upper right corner of the screen.
21.15 Can I move icons from a folder to another screen?
No.
21.16 How do I turn on the scientific calculator?
Open your calculator in landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator.
21.17 Can I quickly move icons to different home screens?
To move one icon:
Use one hand to touch and hold the icon and use the other hand to flick on the screen to move
the icon to another screen.
To move multiple icons:
On the home screen, pinch two fingers together, touch multiple icons to select them, and
touch and hold them to another screen at a time.
21.18 Why does the calculator still rotate after I set my
phone's screen orientation?
Your phone's screen orientation does not affect the calculator.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.19 Why does my phone still display English after I set
the system language to Chinese Simplified?
Google input method does not support Chinese.
21.20 Why can't the icons align with each other after I
enable the shake gesture for aligning icons?
You can only align icons in the icon editing screen.
21.21 Why do I feel electric leakage or shock when I use
the headset?
In areas or seasons with low humidity, electric charge is generated when there is friction
between clothing and headset. The electric charge can't be rapidly transferred but are
accumulated, resulting in static electricity. When you put the headset into your ears, the metal
mesh is in contact with human skins and hair. Once the human body or headset is grounded,
the accumulated static charge is rapidly released, and therefore you feel electric shock. This
phenomenon is especially obvious in a dry environment such as in winter. This is a normal
phenomenon and is not a quality or safety defect of the headset.
21.22 How do I use the noise reduction headset?
The active noise reduction headset is able to actively reduce the external noise and bring you
better sound experience. Different from general active noise reduction headsets that are large
in size, your headset is small and convenient to carry. You can also charge your headset using
your phone and use the headset with another phone for two hours.
The headset controller is an important component of your headset which is installed with a
battery. Please use it with caution and protect it from collision and water exposure.
21.23 Why is my headset jack loose? Why can't I fully
insert my headset connector into the headset jack on my
phone? Why can I only hear a background tune at a small
volume?
Make sure the four-segment metal ring of your headset connector is fully inserted into the
headset jack. Keep inserting the headset connector into the headset jack until you hear a click
sound. After you have fully inserted the headset connector, check whether your headset
functions properly.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.24 Does my phone support the three-button line control
headset?
Yes. Your phone can use most of three-button line control headsets on the market.
However, your phone does not support the line control function of certain headsets, for
example, Apple headset.
To have better audio and line control operation experience, you are suggested to use Huawei
original headset.
21.25 How do I obtain bootloader unlock permissions?
Visit Request unlock code to request an official unlock code. Follow the onscreen instructions
to unlock your bootloader.
Read the unlock disclaimer displayed on the website carefully.
21.26 What do the different indicator colors mean?
The phone's status indicator can show battery status or event notifications.
1.
Blinking red: low battery level; battery over-discharged and can't re-charge; your phone
can't power on.
2.
Steady red (while charging): battery level is below the warning level.
3.
Steady orange (while charging): battery level is above the warning level.
4.
Steady green (while charging): charging is complete or nearly complete.
5.
Blinking green: new message; new email; missed call; calendar reminder; missed alarm.
For some third-party apps such as QQ, Weibo, and WeChat, the indicator may also flash green when there
are new notifications.
21.27 How do I improve the game fluency?
1.
Go to Settings > Power saving > Normal.
2.
Go to Phone Manager > Phone accelerator. Close the apps that are temporarily not
used.
3.
Go to Phone Manager > Storage cleaner. Clean the junk data in your phone according
to the onscreen instructions.
4.
Go to Settings > Startup manager. Disable the apps that do not need to be initiated
upon startup.
5.
Restart your phone.
Because the game screens and your phone screen may not be consistent, related compatibility
processing is required. A large number of special effects are added to the game apps or special
sensors need to be called, which also affect the game fluency.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
If the problem persists, back up important data and restore your phone to its factory settings.
21.28 What can I do if water entered my phone?
1.
If your phone got wet, do not attempt to turn it on or off. If your phone uses a removable
battery, remove it immediately.
2.
Wipe any water from the phone and then place it in a highly water-absorbent
environment, such as active carbon, rice, desiccant, for 48 hours.
3.
Once your phone is dry, try powering it on. If the phone turns on but some features are
not working (for example, the keyboard does not light up or the touchscreen does not
respond), it could be due to a hardware fault. Contact Huawei customer service or take
your phone and purchase invoice to a service center for inspection.
If your phone comes into contact with liquids such as coffee, coke, milk, or salt water, take it to a service
center as soon as possible.
21.29 Are there any risks if I reformat my phone?
After reformatting your phone, there may be deterioration in performance and some features
might not work properly. As third-party firmware is not adequately tested and may not be
compatible with your phone, your phone may be vulnerable to viruses.
Reformatting your phone can have unexpected consequences, exercise caution. If your phone
can't work properly and can't be restored, you are at your own risk.
Huawei authorized service centers can handle software and hardware faults resulted from
reformatting, but charges will apply.
21.30 How do I prevent personal data from being leaked
from my phone?
1.
If your phone is equipped with Phone Manager, open Phone Manager and touch
Permission manager. Prohibit certain apps from accessing personal data according to
the onscreen instructions.
2.
Some third-party apps may allow personal data on your phone to be leaked or deleted.
You can download security apps for your phone which will scan the device and remove
third-party Malware. This helps keep your personal data safe.
3.
Your personal data is at risk when you use Wi-Fi hotspots in locations such as shopping
centers, hotels, restaurants and cafes. Take care when connecting to such hotspots.
21.31 How do I set privacy protection?
On the dialer screen, open the options menu and touch Privacy protection. Enable the privacy
protection according to the onscreen instructions. Set the owner password and visitor
password. Select the contacts, albums, and apps that need privacy protection.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.32 How do I subscribe the favorite magazine unlock
style?
When the screen is locked, flick up on the screen to open the magazine screen. Go to More >
Settings > Subscription.
Subscription Select your favorite magazine style.
21.33 Why isn't the magazine unlock wallpaper updated?
When the screen is locked, flick up on the screen to open the magazine screen. Go to More >
Settings. Enable Auto-update
Auto
via Wi-Fi.
21.34 What functions does smart leather cover provide?
When you use the smart leather cover on your phone, you can view the time and whether
information, receive incoming calls, close the alarms, and play music over the mini wind
window
on the smart leather cover.
Specific functions are subject to the actual product models.
21.35 Why can't I set the incoming call to mute using the
smart leather cover?
1.
Go to Settings > Motions and gestures > Flip. Enable Mute incoming calls
calls. In this
way, youu can set the incoming calls to mute or stop vibration when you flip your phone.
2.
You can also use the volume button to set the incoming calls to mute.
21.36 How do I end a call using the smart cover?
In smart cover mode, you can press the power button to turn the screen on. Then, you can end
the call. Alternatively, you can open the leather cover to end the call.
21.37 Can my phone display multiple windows on the
screen at the same time?
On the Settings screen, enable Suspend button. Touch
windows of calendar, message, Notes, or calculator.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
to rapidly open the suspend
99
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.38 How do I rapidly align the icons on the home screen?
After the action and gesture switch is enabled, touch Shake and touch Auto-align. In the
editing mode of the home screen, you can shake your phone to make your phone
automatically align the icons.
21.39 How do I adjust the font size of Notes?
On the Notes screen, open the options menu and touch Settings. Then, adjust the font size.
There is no specific option for adjusting the font size of the Notes. You can set the font size under
Settings > Display > Font size. The font size of messages and contacts is automatically adjusted
accordingly.
21.40 Does my phone support the counting function?
Your phone supports the convenient counting function.
1.
On the Clock screen, touch the Stopwatch tab. Touch Start to start counting.
2.
During the counting, you can click Lap to measure the number of times.
3.
Click Reset to stop counting.
21.41 Does my phone support the countdown function?
Your phone supports the convenient countdown function.
On the Clock screen, touch the Stopwatch tab. Set the countdown duration and start the
countdown.
21.42 Can I turn off the alarm using the volume buttons?
On the Clock screen, touch the Stopwatch tab. Touch Settings > Volume buttons. Touch
Dismiss.
21.43 Will the alarm go off when my phone is powered
off?
Yes.
When the alarm is enabled, your phone automatically powers on and turns on the alarm.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.44 Can I use a nano-SIM card equipped with a card
holder as a standard micro-SIM card?
No. The nano-SIM card equipped with a card holder and manually-cut card are not standard
cards. You need to contact the service provider to replace cards.
21.45 Smart screenshot
21.45.1 What is smart screenshot?
Smart screenshot is a brand-new touch technology jointly developed by Huawei and Qeexo.
This technology can distinguish the touch operations by fingers or knuckles. Your phone
adopts this technology. You can double-touch any screen using your knuckles to achieve
instant screenshot, which greatly improves the screenshot efficiency.
Besides, you can also draw a circle on the screen using your knuckle to partially capture the
screen. For example, to share a part of the WeChat record, circle the content using your
knuckle to share it with others.
21.45.2 What are differences between screenshot using knuckles
or composite buttons?
There are no differences.
21.45.3 Why does my phone suddenly take a screenshot when I
use it normally?
Your phone achieves screenshot based on your instructions with your knuckles by detecting
the screen touch capacity and signals of the gravity sensor. Through strict tests, the probability
of triggering the screenshot with fingers by mistake during normal use is extremely low. You
may occasionally trigger screenshot only when you continuously knock the screen hard with
your nails. Make sure you use the phone normally, and do no knock the screen hard using
your nails.
21.45.4 How do I partially capture the screen?
On any screen, use your knuckle of any finger (such as the thumb and index finger) to touch
the screen a little harder, and then draw a closed pattern without leaving the screen. After your
phone successfully identifies the knuckle, it generates a blue track that moves along your
knuckle's motion.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
21.45.5 Why can't I draw a track when I partially capture the
screen using my knuckles?
Your phone implements partial screenshot based on the signals of the gravity sensor. If you
slightly draw a circle on the screen, even when you use your knuckle, your phone can't
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
receive the signals. You can rapidly draw a circle on the screen a little harder to achieve
partial screenshot. You can practice for several times to master this operation.
21.45.6 How do I disable smart screenshot?
According to
o adequate tests, smart screenshot basically does not affect your normal use of
your phone. This function brings you great convenience for sharing pictures. Therefore, your
phone does not provide the menu for disabling this function. This requirement will be further
considered and adjusted.
21.45.7 Why do I fail to partially capture the screen even if I draw
a circle?
Successful screenshot using your knuckles depends on whether the circle is closed and
whether any lines are crossed. If you draw a rectangle or a circle,
circle, screenshot can be successful
in most cases. However, if the shapes are greatly different from the algorithms, for example, 6,
C, 8, and W, screenshot fails. However, screenshot can be successful if the irregular polygon
is closed, for example, a hept
heptagon
agon or a starfish. You can practice more to master this
operation.
21.45.8 Does smart screenshot affect the standby time of the
phone?
The algorithm for identifying the knuckles is integrated on the hardware drive layer and
consumes extremely--low current. Therefore,
ore, this function does not affect the standby time.
21.45.9 How do I share the screenshot using the smart screenshot
function?
1.
For a full screen, touch Share and select a sharing mode.
2.
For a partial screen, touch
and select a sharing mode.
21.45.10 How do I save or cancel
cancel the screenshot using the smart
screenshot function?
1.
For a full screen, it is automatically saved.
2.
For a partial screen, touch
in the upper right corner to save it or
in the upper left corner to cancel the saving.
21.45.11 How do I edit the screen partial
partially
ly captured using the
smart screenshot function?
After you partially capture a screen, you can touch
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
to edit the picture:
102
P8 Smartphone FAQs
1.
21 Others
: adjusting the size of the picture
2.
: fuzzy processing for the part you do not want to share
3.
: removing the added mosaic
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
21.46 Speech awareness
21.46.1 What is speech awareness?
If you can't find your phone or you are inconvenient to pick up the phone when your phone is
nearby, you can use the wakeup keywords to wake your phone
phone up or make phone calls.
21.46.2 Do all Huawei phones support the speech awareness
function?
No. The speech awareness function is provided by EMUI 3.1.
21.46.3 How do I use the speech awareness function?
By default, the speech awareness function is disabled. You can enable it under Settings >
Smart assistance > Speech awareness.
awareness. Then, make simple settings and voice practices and
you can use the speech awareness function.
Currently, your phone supports the following speech awareness functions:
1.
Finding your phone: You can say "Hello, E, where are you?"
2.
Making phone calls: You can say "Hello, E, please call Xiaohua."
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
21.46.4 What are differences between standard wakeup keywords
and customized wakeup keywords?
Standard wakeup keywords "Hello, E" and "Okay, EMY" are specially optimized by Huawei.
These wakeup keywords have a high success wakeup rate. You are recommended to use these
standard wakeup keywords.
Customized wakeup keywords make the speech awareness
awareness interesting, but have a lower
success wakeup rate. The success wakeup rate is also related to the customized wakeup
keywords. You are suggested to select the cadenced words with four or five syllables.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Ltd
103
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.46.5 Why can I wake up my phone while my friend can't?
Regardless of standard wakeup keywords or customized wakeup keywords, you need to
practice and make your phone more familiar with your voice, so as to provide you a better
wakeup experience. Therefore, your success wakeup rate is higher than others.
Your friends can practice the wakeup keywords using your phone to better use the speech
awareness function.
21.46.6 Why do I frequently fail the wakeup keyword practices?
The voice practice session is important to achieve a better speech awareness experience. The
more stringent of the voice practice, the higher the success speech awareness rate.
Try make the voice practices in a quiet environment. If your phone prompts for high input
volume, hold your phone at an angle of 45° and keep a 20-40 cm distance with your phone.
21.46.7 Why can't I wake up my phone using the microphone
when I wear a headset?
The speech awareness experience is closely associated with the performance and parameters
of the microphone. Because your phone does not learn that you are using the microphone of
the headset, it still collects the wakeup voice using the phone's microphone.
The Bluetooth headset also encounters such an issue.
21.46.8 Why can't I wake up my phone?
You can use the following methods to improve the success wakeup rate:
1.
You are suggested to use the standard wakeup keyword type. If you use Custom
wakeup keyword, select the cadenced words with four or five syllables.
2.
Try making the voice practices in a quiet environment using natural voice speed and
tone.
3.
Environment noise affects the wakeup rate and identification rate.
21.46.9 Why can't my phone identify my voice instructions
(making phone calls) although it can be woken up?
Through your practices, your phone can better identify the wakeup keywords. However, the
instructions are diversified. Even for the same instruction, you have various expressions, for
example, call Xiaohua or make a call to Xiaohua, which can't be practiced one by one. In
addition, due to the environment noise and voice speed and tone, your phone can't achieve the
same success identification rate as the wakeup function.
To achieve a higher success identification rate, try the following methods:
Issue 01 (2015/03)
1.
Use standard Mandarin to say a voice instruction.
2.
After you say the wakeup keywords, stop for a while and then say the instruction.
3.
If your phone does not identify the instruction, wait until your phone prompts you to
input the voice instruction again.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.46.10 Why is the success rate of finding my phone using voice
instruction too low?
The environment noise is large or the microphone's hole is blocked.
21.46.11 Why can't I use a wakeup keyword fewer than four
syllables?
Through the tests, it is found that the success wakeup rate using wakeup keywords with four
or more syllables is high and the wakeup error rate is low. Therefore, the number of syllables
is restricted to provide you a better wakeup experience.
21.46.12 Why does my phone require me to register before using
the speech awareness function?
This requirement is to make your phone better learn your voice features and provide you a
better speech awareness experience.
21.46.13 Can I use a more complex voice instruction, for example,
music or navigation?
We hope to deeply research and optimize the most common and required voice input
scenarios. Therefore, currently, we design the voice instructions for making phone calls and
finding your phone. The instructions for playing music or performing navigation may be
planned in later versions.
21.46.14 Why does my phone call a different contact when I input
voice instructions?
Currently, the success identification rate can't achieve 100% in the industry. If the
pronunciations of two contacts are similar, your phone may incorrectly identify the voice
instruction. The voice identification algorithm engine will be further optimized.
21.46.15 Why isn't the flash on after my phone responds to my
speech awareness instruction?
When the battery level is higher than 20%, the flash is turned on to help you find your phone.
However, if the battery level is low, the flash is not on to save power.
21.46.16 Does the speech awareness function consume too much
power if it is always enabled?
This function appreciably increases the power consumption if it is always enabled. It does not
cause obvious impacts on your daily use. Therefore, you can enable it.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.46.17 Why does my phone prompt "voice instruction failed to
be identified" when I speak with others?
The speech awareness function is incorrectly triggered. The noise may be recorded and
practiced when you practice the wakeup keywords. Try practicing the wakeup keywords in a
quiet environment. This function will be further optimized.
21.46.18 How do I choose the customized wakeup keywords to
achieve a better wakeup experience?
1.
A wakeup keyword should contain at least four syllables (four characters for the wakeup
keyword in Chinese).
2.
The wakeup keyword should cover as more syllables as possible, instead of similar or
repeated syllables.
3.
The difference between adjacent syllables in the wakeup keyword should be as large as
possible. For example, the difference between adjacent syllables of wakeup keyword
"Kaiyue online" is large, while that of wakeup keyword "Yuyin online" is small.
4.
A good wakeup keyword has the following features: large mouth opening degree, large
loudness, clear pronounce, and compound finals for vowels.
5.
The wakeup keyword can be the word that is rarely used.
21.46.19 Why is the wakeup keyword still in Chinese even if I
have changed the system language to English?
Your phone supports speech awareness languages in Chinese and English. You can set the
speech awareness language under Speech command language instead of system language
settings.
21.46.20 How do I enable the speech awareness function?
In the EMUI 3.1 system, touch Settings. In All, go to Smart assistance > Speech awareness.
Touch Speech awareness.
The figures are for your reference only. The actual screens may vary.
21.46.21 Can I set the wakeup keywords?
Yes.
21.46.22 How do I set the wakeup keywords?
In the EMUI 3.1 system, touch Settings. In All, go to Smart assistance > Speech awareness.
Touch Wakeup keyword type and then Custom wakeup keyword. Set new wakeup
keyword type according to the onscreen instructions.
21.46.23 What are suggested wakeup keywords?
The wakeup keywords should be easy to identify. The wakeup keyword should contain 4-6
Chinese characters. Do not use reduplicated words or popular words.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
P8 Smartphone FAQs
21 Others
21.46.24 What should I pay attention to when I practice the
wakeup keywords?
You are suggested to practice the wakeup keyword in a quiet environment to avoid
misoperation by other voice or noise.
21.46.25 Does my phone only support Chinese wakeup keywords?
Yes. You need to say the wakeup keywords in mandarin.
21.46.26 Can I set the wakeup keywords in English?
No, you can't.
21.46.27 Why doesn't my phone respond to the wakeup keyword?
You need to set and practice the wakeup keywords in a quiet environment. The wakeup
keywords should be easy to identify. Do not use reduplicated words or popular words. If your
phone does not respond to the wakeup keyword, try again in a quiet environment or set a new
wakeup keyword.
21.46.28 Why is the wakeup keyword practice failed and why
does the recording screen keep being displayed (0/3)?
If the recording screen keeps being displayed "(0/3)", you may keep holding the microphone
icon on the practice screen. When you practice the wakeup keywords, press the microphone
icon and immediately release it. The corresponding animation is played, and then you can
start the practice.
21.47 Does my phone support smart screen split?
No
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
P8 Smartphone FAQs
22 Product specifications (TODO)
22
Product specifications (TODO)
22.1 Basic specifications of products in different standards
P8规格参数.xlsx
P8关键器件供应商
清单.xlsx
22.2 List of pre-installed apps
P8预置第三方应用
预置清单.xlsx
22.3 Bluetooth compatibility list
P8蓝牙兼容性设备.
xlsx
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
P8 Smartphone FAQs
22 Product specifications (TODO)
22.4 microSD card compatibility list
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Speed
class
Purchase
location
microSD
card
protocol
standard
No.
Manufacturer
Capacity
1
Verbatim
2 GB
China
SD 1.0
2
Nokia
2 GB
USA
SD 1.0
3
Dane-Elec
16 GB
Class 2
USA
SD 2.0
4
Lexar
4 GB
Class 4
USA
SD 2.0
5
PNY
8 GB
Class 4
USA
SD 2.0
6
Kingston
8 GB
Class 4
Denmark
SD 2.0
7
SanDisk
4 GB
Class 6
Denmark
SD 2.0
8
Hama
8 GB
Class 4
Sweden
SD 2.0
9
TOPRAM
32 GB
Class 4
USA
SD 2.0
10
Dane-Elec
32 GB
Class 2
USA
SD 2.0
11
Filemate
16 GB
Class 10
USA
SD 2.0
12
Apacer
4 GB
Class 6
China
SD 2.0
13
PQI
2 GB
2 GB
China
SD 1.0
14
Transcend
16 GB
Class 6
China
SD 2.0
15
Esuninfo
4 GB
Class 4
China
SD 2.0
16
Samsung
4 GB
Class 4
China
SD 2.0
17
KingMax
1 GB
China
SD 1.0
18
Samsung
8 GB
Class 4
China
19
Lexar
64 GB
Class 10
China
SD3.0
20
Samsung
64 GB
Class 10
China
SD3.0
21
Sony
64 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
22
Transcend
64 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
23
Toshiba
64 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
24
SanDisk
128 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
25
Daffodil
64 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
26
Panasonic
8 GB
SD 2.0
Japan
SD 2.0
27
Sony
8 GB
Class 4
Japan
SD 2.0
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
P8 Smartphone FAQs
22 Product specifications (TODO)
Purchase
location
microSD
card
protocol
standard
No.
Manufacturer
Capacity
Speed
class
28
Buffalo
16 GB
Class 4
Japan
SD 2.0
29
Toshiba
16 GB
Class 10
Japan
SD 2.0
30
Panasonic
4 GB
Class 10
Japan
SD 2.0
31
Panasonic
16 GB
Class 10
Japan
SD 2.0
32
SanDisk
16 GB
Class 4
China
SD 2.0
33
PQI
4 GB
Class 4
China
SD 2.0
34
SanDisk
32 GB
China
SD 2.0
35
SanDisk
8 GB
Class 4
China
SD 2.0
36
PQI
4 GB
Class 6
China
SD 2.0
37
SanDisk
4 GB
China
SD 2.0
38
PQI
8 GB
Class 6
China
SD 2.0
39
Filemate
8 GB
Class 6
USA
SD 2.0
40
Nokia
2 GB
USA
SD 1.0
41
Kingston
8 GB
Class 4
Denmark
SD 2.0
42
TOPRAM
32 GB
Class 4
USA
SD 2.0
43
KingMax
1 GB
China
SD 1.0
44
Lexar
64 GB
Class 10
China
SD3.0
45
SanDisk
128 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
46
Toshiba
16 GB
Class 10
Japan
SD 2.0
47
Panasonic
4 GB
Class 10
Japan
SD 2.0
48
Team Group
128 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
49
Samsung
128 GB
Class 10
China
SD 3.0
22.5 Memory partition
The ROM and RAM sizes displayed on your phone may be smaller than the values in the
phone specifications, because the system occupies a part. Your phone has a 16 GB ROM and
3 GB RAM. Except for the part that is occupied by the system, you have an available RAM of
at least 350 MB.
16 GB ROM:
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
P8 Smartphone FAQs
22 Product specifications (TODO)
The ROM contains system apps, files, and databases, which takes up about 1.5 GB. The ROM
space available to users is 1.99 GB. You can use this 1.99 GB space to store any types of files.
The following lists the ROM comparison between your phone and other phones:
Galaxy III: total: 16 GB, available: 11. 35 GB
Galaxy Note: total: 4 GB, available: 1.51 GB
HUAWEI G520: total: 4 GB, available: 1.84 GB
HUAWEI T8950: total: 4 GB, available: 1.82 GB
1 GB RAM:
The Android system hides a part of the RAM for Kernel running. Therefore, the displayed
RAM is smaller than the value in the specifications. The available RAM for users is at least
350 MB.
The following lists the comparison of the 1 GB RAM with other phones:
Galaxy III: 763 MB available
Galaxy Note: 713 MB available
HUAWEI C8950: 627 MB available
HUAWEI T9200: 656 MB available
HUAWEI T9510E: 713 MB available
HUAWEI T8950: 980 MB available
The following table lists the allocation of the ROM and RAM.
ROM partitions (a phone ROM is similar to a hard disk on a computer)
64 GB
Partition
Size
Description
Query
method
Boot and operating system
data backup partition
About 128
MB
This partition stores the boot and operating system
backup data.
The data in this partition is used when you restore
your phone to its factory settings.
Cannot be
queried
Partition reserved for
HOTA updates
256 MB
This partition is reserved for HOTA updates.
The device provider or the carrier pushes update
patches using this partition.
Cannot be
queried
System partition
2560 MB
This partition is used for the Android operating
system.
Cannot be
queried
Virtual microSD card
partition (Data partition)
53.4 GB
This partition is used when your phone has no
microSD card inserted and certain operations,
such as taking photos, transmitting files using
Bluetooth, and synchronizing data with a
computer, need to be performed. With this
partition, you can use all functions provided on
the Android system without an additional
microSD card.
Can be
queried
under
Settings >
Storage >
SD card.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
P8 Smartphone FAQs
22 Product specifications (TODO)
ROM partitions (a phone ROM is similar to a hard disk on a computer)
64 GB
Data partition
53.4 GB
This partition is used for running the operating
system or apps. This partition also stores the files
for apps you install.
Can be
queried
using a
third-party
app
Others
About 700
MB
This partition includes the space occupied by file
partition tables, space occupied by flag tables of
flash material bad blocks, and space lost due to
formatting.
Cannot be
queried
Total
64 GB
These partitions are for your reference only.
Partition sizes vary according to the product
customized version. For the standard
configuration, the size is 16 GB; and for the
premium, the size is 64 GB.
RAM partitions (a phone RAM is similar to the RAM of a computer)
3 GB
Partition
Size
Description
Query
method
Bottom partition
About 56
MB
This partition saves the display cache and bottom
wireless protocol stacks.
Cannot be
queried
Operating system and user
partition
About 2.5
GB
This partition is used by the Android operating
system and apps.
Can be
queried
using a
third-party
app but the
value may
differ by
app
Total
3 GB
These partitions are for your reference only.
Partition sizes vary according to the product
customized version.
Issue 01 (2015/03)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112